Samsung Informatique Ordinateur Portable NP-R610 NP-R610-AS08FR - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels
Samsung Informatique Ordinateur Portable NP-R610 NP-R610-AS08FR - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels
SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
- Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung
- Revenir à l'accueil
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
|
Description
|
Date de distribution 
|
Langue
|
Fichier
|
|---|
|
Trouble Shooting Guide
|
2011.10.10
|
ANGLAIS
|
5.45 MB
|
|
Trouble Shooting Guide
|
2011.10.10
|
FRANÇAIS
|
5.75 MB
|
|
Manuel de l'utilisateur (Vista)
|
2009.01.14
|
ANGLAIS
|
16.64 MB
|
|
Manuel de l'utilisateur (Vista)
|
2009.01.14
|
FRANÇAIS
|
16.64 MB
|
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R610-AS08FR-downloads?downloadName=DR
COMMANDER un produit SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM
Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta
Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :
Samsung-Monitors-2493HM-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Exhibit-4G-Android-Smartphone-SGH-T759-USA-Etats-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV12PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6500VQ-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerators-26-CU-FT-FRENCH-DOOR-REFRIGERATOR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-QX510-NP-QX510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-Q35-NP-Q35T007-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9201NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-9301NA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-X420I-NP-X420-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S5150-gold-Open-market-GT-S5150-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-Neo-Forte-EHS-Hybride-NH022NHXEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-S06FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-LED-19-D4003-Series-4-LED-TV%20-UE19D4003BW-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Netbook-NP-N220-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-R519-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Inde-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SCX-8123NA-Manuels
Samsung-SCX-3400-Pakistan-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Notebook-ATIV-Smart-PC-XE500T1C-3G-XE500T1C-H01SG-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-ML-1674-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C430-PS50C430A1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-S3100-gris-Open-market-GT-S3100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32C4000-UE32C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-23-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T23A350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32B350F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-BD-P1600A-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-C6930W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26C4000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R719NP-R719-XA01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-5-550P7C-NP550P7C-T02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-SSD-Basic-Kit-64-GoMZ-7PC064B-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Samsung-Smart-Camera-NX210-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Sans-sac-SC8850-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-gril-niche-380-mm-23-L-FG87SST-FG87SST-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBSL-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-vaisselle-DW5363PGBWQ-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Feature-Phone-GT-E1175T-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C530-LE46C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Nexus-GT-I9250-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5800P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-550-noir-Open-market-GT-I5500-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-DP700A3D-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-WB100-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-MM-E430D-Micro-chaine-DVD-DivX-Double-Dock-USB-Bluetooth-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-YH-820MW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S22B150N-Manuels
Samsung-Stockage-informatique-Graveur-DVD-Slim-External-8X-DVD-Writer-SE-208AB-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Plaque-de-cuisson-CTN431SC0S-Manuels
24ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6250FX-Samsung-Manuels
32-UE32D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D6200TS-Samsung-Manuels
35-35ppm-Copieur-couleur-CLX-9350ND-Samsung-Manuels
Galaxy-Y-S5360-AndroidGT-S5360-Manuels-Utilisateur-et-Guides-Rapide-Samsung
Manuels-de-l-Utilisateur-19-UE19D4000WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LED-TV-UE19D4000NW-Samsung
N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R730-Red-Gloss-NP-R730-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-SGH-I320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV510-NP-RV510-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7ANP300E7A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-40-UE40D7000WXZF-serie-7-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D7000LS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E1150-rouge-Open-market-GT-E1150-Manuels
Samsung-Téléphone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT08FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-Style-Open-market-SGH-F480-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350V5C-NP350V5C-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-RV511-NP-RV511-A06MA-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-R590-Crystal-NP-R590-JS01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R530E-NP-R530-JT50FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C630-LE32C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-S850-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6530WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D6530WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Player-City-blanc-Orange-GT-S5260P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-PDP-2012-PS43E450A1R-43-inch-HD-Ready-Plasma-TV-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Robot-Aspirateur-Robot-2-murs-Virtuel-Noir-SR8895-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E2530-Open-market-GT-E2530-Manuels
Samsung-Peripheriques-pour-PC-Multifonctions-monochromes-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-I9300-GT-I9300-Afrique-du-Nord-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ST66-SAMSUNG-ST66-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-Mono-Multi-function-SCX-3405FW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Samsung-GALAXY-S-III-GALAXY-S3-GT-I9300-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Music-GT-S6010-Royaume-Uni-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Mounted-Fridge-Freezer-SR365TSS-Nouvelle-Zelande-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Top-Loader-Top-Load-Washing-Machine-WA10W9-Singapour-Manuels
Samsung-electromenagers-Front-Loader-WF710Y4BKWQ-EN-Belgique-Manuels
Samsung-PC-Office-LCD-LED-S22C200BW-Hong-Kong-Manuels
Samsung-Camaras-Alta-definicion-Videocamara-HD-F80HMX-F80SP-Espagne-Manuels
Samsung-Mobile-Phone-Smart-Phone-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Emirats-Arabes-Unis-Manuels
Samsung-Sprzet-komputerowy-i-Drukarki-Notebooki-NP-R710-AS04PL-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-Informatica-LCD-2043SW-Portugues-Portugais-Bresil-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-Blu-ray-HT-E3550-English-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-Camera-Camcorder-Compact-ES90-14.2MP-Digital-Camera-FIND-A-PRODUCT-SAMSUNG-ES90-English-Anglais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X1B-NP900X1B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0CFR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT50QMSW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46EH6030W-Manuels
Samsung-Home-Appliance-Side-by-Side-RSA1STMG-Arabe-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS59D6900DS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7C-NP700Z7C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-Side-By-Side-RS6178UGDSR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-S730-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-E590-Manuels
20ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-6220FX-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-5100P-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-XE500T1C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R610-NP-R610-FS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-RC710E-NP-RC710-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-francais-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF5FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C520-Hello-Kitty-Open-marketS-GH-C520-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-Player-mini-2GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP530U3C-NP530U3C-A06FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5C-NP700Z5C-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-Camera-EK-GC100-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-SGH-Z360-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A856-LE46A856S1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B620T2WXXC-LE40B620R3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A568-LE40A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQ18FAN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4C-NP900X4C-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-NL22B-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46A568-LE46A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE65ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-65-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE65ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-C6625-gris-Open-market-GT-C6625-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46B8000WW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Corby-Pro-rouge-Open-market-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrigerateur-SBS-A-507-L-Blanc-RSA1TWP-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D430DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A626-LE40A626A3M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-GT-C3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-C3520-GT-C3520-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-Refrig%C3%A9rateur-SBS-A-510-L-Inox-RSH5TERS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-mono-23L-SILVER-ME82V-Manuels*
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40D503F7W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2165-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Side-By-Side-RSA1DTMG-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-SF-6900-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-C5530-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B300BL-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-HT-D4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730C-NP-R730-JB03FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-R-mix-YP-R1JCP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-P2470HD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P1600-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J770-Open-market-SGH-J770-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Home-cinema-DVD-5.1-HT-D350WXZF-serie-3HT-D350-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-CLX-6200FX-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-Smart-Camera-WB850F-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z5AH-NP700Z5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP305V5AD-NP305V5A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6530S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50A456-PS50A456P2D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6570WS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-22-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T22A300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-S2-YP-S2QB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-24ppm-Imprimante-laser-mono-ML-2580N-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-3710ND-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40D5003BW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-P2500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Definition-Standard-5-MP-Ecran-LCD-2.7-6.86-cm-Camescope-SD-Samsung-F700-SMX-F700BP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R710-NP-R710-ASS1FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-SAMSUNG-PL101-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A566P1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46D550K1W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Plusieurs-Pieces-MH026FWEA-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV07PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50B850-PS50B850Y1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37D5000ZF-UE37D5000PW-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-NH300WHXES-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40ES5700S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-60-UE60D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE60D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32D403E2W-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-ST500-SAMSUNG-ST500-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S3-GT-I9300-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-27-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T27A300-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1170-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE22C350-LE22C350D1W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-J700-SGH-J700G-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-Micro-ondes-Gril-23L-SILVER-GS89F-1SPGS89F-1SP-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-300E5A-NP300E5A-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B5B-NP400B5B-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-12-5-Serie-4-Gamme-Professionnelle-400B2B-NP400B2B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-RC-RC730-NP-RC730-S05FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-Multifonction-monochrome-SCX-3405W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-de-bureau-23-Serie-7-All-In-One-700A3B-DP700A3B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-RC-RC530-NP-RC530-S03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-3-300E5-ANP300E5A-S08FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-Lecteur-blu-ray-BD-D6900WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3DBD-D6900-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A568-LE37A568P3M-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-24-Serie-3-Moniteur-LED-TV-T24A350-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-G600-Open-market-SGH-G600-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Wireless-Audio-with-Dock-DA-E650-ZF-Double-Dock-Bluetooth-3.0-USB-AUXDA-E650-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Haute-Definition-HMX-QF20BP-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-PL90-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C550-LE32C550J1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE23R86BD-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE26C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A436T1D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-GT-E1151-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-P3YP-P3JCB-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Couleur-16-4ppm-Multifonction-laser-couleur-CLX-3185W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique%20Multifonction-Monochrome-24ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4824FN-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-11-6-Serie-7-Slate-PC-700T1A-3G-XE700T1A-H01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9100G-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-F250-Open-market-SGH-F250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730-NP-R730-JA05FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE26D4003BW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-7-Gamer-700G7A-NP700G7A-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Nouveau-Serie-9-900X3C-NP900X3C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4.0-Blanc-8GoYP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Micro-Chaine-Hi-Fi-Micro-chaine-MM-D470DWXZF-serie-4-DVD-MM-D470D-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Solid-B2100-rouge-Open-market-GT-B2100-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U3B-NP530U3B-A02FR-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-Chat-335-gris-Open-market-GT-S3350-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Xcover-GT-S5690-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B530P7W-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-WF0702NBE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-Home-cinema-blu-ray-HT-D6750WWXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55C7700-UE55C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-Blu-ray-BD-E8300-ZF-Enregistreur-Blu-Ray-320-Go-SMART-HUB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE46C750-LE46C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Enregistreur-DVD-DVD-SH893-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-NX-Systeme-NX-NX100-14-6-MP-Ecran-7-6cm-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-Imprimante-couleur-CLP-365-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-3-305E5A-NP305E5A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-15-6-Serie-2-Gamme-Professionnelle-200A5B-NP200B5B-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Samsung-Q3YP-Q3CB-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-B3310bleu-Open-market-GT-B3310-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-U600-Open-market-SGH-U600B-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Samsung-E250-Open-market-SGH-E250-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S24B350H-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP350E7C-NP350E7C-S0BFR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES7000-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE55ES7000S-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP900X4D-NP900X4D-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP700Z7CH-NP700Z7C-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z3A-NP700Z3A-S02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-SUR40-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE32D6510WS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-300V3A-NP300V3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ultra-Mobilite-NP-NC10-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Monochrome-Imprimante-monochrome-ML-2160-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R720E-NP-R720-JS03FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R730CE-NP-R730-JT07FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP-R620E-NP-R620-JS02FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32D5720RS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP550P5C-NP550P5C-T04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D8000WXZF-serie-8-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE55D8000YS-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-17-3-Serie-3-300E7A-NP300E7A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-RV-RV515-NP-RV515-S04FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3DUE46ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-14-2MP-Ecran-3-hVGA-Smart-Camera-Samsung-WB150F-SAMSUNG-WB150F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40ES6900-ZF-Slim-LED-40-SMART-TV-3DUE40ES6900S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-HG40EA590LS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Home-Cinema-Blu-ray-HT-E8200-ZF-Barre-de-son-Blu-Ray-3D-Bluetooth-HT-E8200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Electromenager-Micro-ondes-CE117PPT-Manuels
Samsung-TV-AV-3D-TV-TV-UN50ES6350F-Coree-du-Sud-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Multifonction-Monochrome-19ppm-Multifonction-laser-mono-SCX-4200-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-32-32ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-770ND-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Imprimante-Couleur-16-4ppm-Imprimante-laser-couleur-CLP-320-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-32-UE32D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9000-RW8-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels
Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels
Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels
Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels
Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels
Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels
Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels
Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels
Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels
Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels
Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels
Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels
Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels
SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels
Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels
Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels
Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels
Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels
Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels
Samsung-910MP-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels
Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels
Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels
Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels
Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels
Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels
Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels
Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels
Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels
Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels
Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels
Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels
Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels
Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels
Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels
Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel
Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel
Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels
Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels
Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels
Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels
Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels
Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels
Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels
Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels
Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels
Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels
Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels
Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels
Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels
Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels
Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels
Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels
Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels
Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels
Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels
Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels
Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels
Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels
Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels
Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels
Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels
Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels
17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels
40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels
CLX-3185FW Manuels
Galaxy Ace GT-S5830
Galaxy S II GT-I9100
Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16
Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16
Galaxy YGT-S5360
LE32C350 LE32C350D1W
LE40C630 LE40C630K1W
MM-C330D
MM-D330D
Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels
N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels
N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels
RSH5UEPN
SGH-F490
Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels
Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000
Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000
Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels
T23A550 T23A550
UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS
UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels
Wave 575 GT-S5750E
Wave II GT-S8530
16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels
16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung
16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung
samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels
Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels
Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels
Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels
Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels
| PRODUITS SAMSUNG : |
| Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide |
| Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets |
| Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes |
| Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S |
| Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360° |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung |
| Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung |
| Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir |
| Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800 |
| G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100 |
| Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet |
| Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab |
| Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir |
| Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB |
| Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830 |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes |
| Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes |
| Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique) |
| Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace |
| Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir |
| Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret |
| Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830 |
| Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100 |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom |
| Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA |
| QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 |
| QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED |
| Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste |
| Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD |
| Samsung B5722 Double SIM |
| Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles |
| Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310 |
| Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP420E |
| Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST |
| Samsung batterie SLB-10A |
| Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS |
| Samsung BD-E5300 |
| Samsung BD-E5500 3D |
| Samsung BD-E6100 3D |
| Samsung BD-E8300 3D |
| Samsung BD-ES5000 |
| Samsung BD-ES6000 3D |
| Samsung C3050 Stratus |
| Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1" |
| Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung |
| Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100 |
| Samsung CB20A12 |
| Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB |
| Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir |
| Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir |
| Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung CLP-C300A |
| Samsung CLP-K300A |
| Samsung CLP-M300A |
| Samsung CLP-Y300A |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi |
| Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0 |
| Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series |
| Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series |
| Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170 |
| Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 |
| Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel |
| Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui |
| Samsung E1150 - Silver |
| Samsung ES90 Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir |
| Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir |
| Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir |
| Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
| Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S |
| Samsung EX1 |
| Samsung Flash SEF15A |
| Samsung Flash SEF20A |
| Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Note |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre |
| Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet |
| Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go |
| Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android) |
| Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir |
| Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB |
| Samsung HMX-F80 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" |
| Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung HT-D330 |
| Samsung HT-D350 |
| Samsung HT-D4500 |
| Samsung HT-D5000 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E4500 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5200 3D |
| Samsung HT-E5530 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES4200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES6200 3D |
| Samsung HT-ES8200 3D |
| Samsung HW-E350 |
| Samsung HW-E450 |
| Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android) |
| Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1" |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX |
| Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220 |
| Samsung kit HDMI |
| Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm |
| Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm |
| Samsung LE32E420 |
| Samsung LE40D503 |
| Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500 |
| Samsung ML-2010D3 |
| Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet |
| Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome |
| Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung MLT-D1052S |
| Samsung MLT-D1082S |
| Samsung MLT-D1092S |
| Samsung MM-D430D |
| Samsung MM-E320 |
| Samsung MV800 Noir |
| Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir |
| Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED |
| Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED |
| Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED |
| Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS |
| Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8 |
| Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides |
| Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200 |
| Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100 |
| Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go |
| Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED |
| Samsung PL210 Noir |
| Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go |
| Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal |
| Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante |
| Samsung PS43E450 |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D |
| Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung PS51E450 |
| Samsung PS51E490 3D |
| Samsung PS51E530 |
| Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED |
| Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes |
| Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display |
| Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED |
| Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung S23B350H 23" LED |
| Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED |
| Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED |
| Samsung S27B350H 27" LED |
| Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions |
| Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-4200A |
| Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi |
| Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet |
| Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0 |
| Samsung SLB07A pour ST50 |
| Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000 |
| Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi |
| Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi |
| Samsung ST65 Noir |
| Samsung ST65 Rouge |
| Samsung ST66 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Blanc |
| Samsung ST77 Noir |
| Samsung ST77 Rouge |
| Samsung ST77 Violet |
| Samsung ST88 Noir |
| Samsung station d'accueil |
| Samsung station d'accueil HD2 |
| Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9" |
| Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED |
| Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED |
| Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D |
| Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX |
| Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD |
| Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir |
| Samsung UE19ES4000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5000 LED |
| Samsung UE22ES5410 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE26EH4500 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH4000 LED |
| Samsung UE32EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE37ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40D5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46EH5000 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES5500 LED |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc |
| Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D |
| Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go |
| Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir |
| Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron |
| Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose |
| Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10 |
| Samsung Wave 575 |
| Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi |
| Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi |
| Samsung WB690 Noir |
| Samsung WB700 Noir |
| Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS |
| Samsung WMN250M accroche murale |
| Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD |
| Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go |
| Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go |
| Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go |
| Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go |
| Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX |
| Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go |
| Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go |
| T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta |
| Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune |
| Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune |
| Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0 |
| We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0 |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche |
| Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc |
| Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir |
Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia
Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir
Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES
SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U
Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B
SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi
Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung E2550
Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur
Samsung ES30 Noir
Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D423
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE40D550
Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir
Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB
SAMSUNG ME106V-SX
Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction
SAMSUNG ME82V-SX
SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX
SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S
Samsung PL170 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43D450
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS59D530
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SC4340 noir ébène
Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19D4010 LED
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32D5000 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D5710 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB750 Noir
Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
http://www.samsung.com/us/support/owners/product/RF266AEBP
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP400B5B-S02FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/BD-C8500/XEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100405125800515/01960B-BD-C8200_8500-XEF-FRA-0323.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/MM-D470D/ZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120103150428464/AH68-02345F-MM-D470D-FRA-20120103.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP200B5B-A01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300V3A-A01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/uk/support/model/NP-R519-FA06UK-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D8000YSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/02_FRA_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201201/20120128101809663/01_ENG_GPDVBEUA-0106.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120314192959318/[UD8000-XN]BN68-03442T-00L04-0804.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46ES6710SXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120405165711377/2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/02-XTDVBEUE-FRA-1109.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121110095845360/01-XTDVBEUE-ENG-1109.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_FRA-0424.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120712095934377/2012_Skype_ENG-0424.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RV515-S04FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/CD/201104/20110408115840622/DoC160-RV515-RV415-Scala2-15-14-AMD.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026202221731/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP350E7C-S0BFR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121022141232121/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120518170921365/EN/english.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/DR/201205/20120521130845677/FR/french.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/ML-2160/SEE-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120322160533913/BN68-03304C-00.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120622172918410/BN46-00030A-Eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55C7700WSXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130400267/02230C-01-BD-E8900-ZF-0413.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502130543045/Smart_Hub-FRA-0309.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120502133933796/AllShare-FRA-0221.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100426150918218/7Series_Power_consumption_LED_TV.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100529095515140/BN68-02590B-03L04-0518.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700G7A-S01FR
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305E5A-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026193501356/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-COMMON-ENGLISH3.0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200904/20090407081834937/YPP3J-02154C-XEF-QG1.0-NOCD.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090428183905421/YPP3J-EUROPE-FRENCH3.0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201005/20100504091945781/GT-E1151_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100311.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324124741578/BN68-02592F-01L04_0316.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080520175711468_BN68-01409H-01L02-0429.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200805/20080530182204609_Pearl-France-01409H-Eng-0530.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT24A350EW/EN-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E5A-S08FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE22C350D1WXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40R86BDX/XEC-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070322190622750_BN68-01169B-01L08-0313.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE40ES5700SXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LT22A300EW/EN-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-U600HBAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200803/20080318192114953_SGH-U600_Eng.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200903/20090312154510796/SGH-U600_French_090311_Rev1.3.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200904/20090410095951906/SGH-U600_UG_090311_Rev1.3.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP305V5A-S02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120420172612547/WB850F-CE_DoC_in_French.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/AQ18FAN-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200703/20070308174715062_FORTE_DB98-27531A_IB_F.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE40B620R3WXXC-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/200909/20090925093818484/BN68-02098D-01Eng-0909.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-Z360ZSAFTM-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200801/20080108134949406_SGH-Z360_UG_ORA_Fre_Rev.1.1_061123.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/EK-GC100ZWAXEF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP900X4D-A02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026104030074/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP700Z7C-S02FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121028112443918/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-RC710-S02FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-E590NSAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200706/20070627104827281_SGH-E590_UG_Eng_Rev.1.1_070622.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RS6178UGDSR/EF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201203/20120316175747467/DA99-01779L.pdf
https://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP300E7A-S0CFR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/RT50QMSW1/XEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121119193716527/DA99-01906C_v0.6.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE46EH6030WXZF-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/GT-I9300RWDXSP-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121117090011154/GT-I9300_UM_EU_Jellybean_Eng_Rev.1.1_121113_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121122102418917/GT-I9300_UM_SEA_Jellybean_Chi_Rev.1.1_121116_Screen.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201102/20110228142459539/DJ68-00558R_0.0.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-S5260RWPFTM
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LE32C630K1WXZF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201003/20100322135354718/BN68-02802A-00Eng_0310.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R530-JT50FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP-R590-JS01FR-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/SGH-F480ESAXEF-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200805/20080509152035250_SGH-F480_UG_Fre_Rev.1.0_080509.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200911/20091118083418500/SGH-F480i_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_090527.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121026124954559/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201004/20100415162800953/UPD_Guide_EN.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100329103902500/BN68-02655A-00L06-0304.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201003/20100324125247750/BN68-02655D-00L04-0304.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE55D6300SSXZF
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111208190112921/Web_GSDVBEUA_FRE.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/YH-820MW/ELS
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/200508/20050829114410765_YH820-ELS-FRE0[1].0.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201106/20110630112704040/FR/french.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120718221859806/WB100_WB101_French.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216102348708/SX5DVBEU1A-ENG.pdf
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201210/20121009090604327/Win8_Manual_chs.pdf
http://www.samsung.com/sg/support/model/XE500T1C-H01SG-downloads
http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/DP700A3D-A01FR-downloads
http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121129094347177/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf
BN68-01985L-00
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care centre.
Country Customer Care Centre Web Site
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/uk
LED TV
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model Serial No.
BN68-01985L_Cover.indd 1 2009-03-27 �� 6:41:32
English
Information on Use
Precautions When Displaying a Still Image
A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen.
Do not display a still image and partially still image on the LED panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen
image retention. This image retention is also known as screen burn. To avoid such image retention, reduce the degree of
brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image.
Watching the LED TV in 4:3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the
left, right and centre of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen.
Playing a DVD or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen.
Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty.
Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after-images.
To prevent this effect, reduce the ‘brightness’ and ‘contrast’ when displaying still images.
WARNINGS:
Image retention, commonly known as screen burn-in, can occur on most types of television if the same image is displayed continuously.
The most common causes of image retention are logos that remain stationary on the TV screen. These logos are common on many
programmes received via a Set-top Box.
To reduce this risk, avoid displaying still images for long durations and lower the brightness or contrast settings to decrease the
intensity of the picture. Extended viewing of movies and programs in aspect ratios that are different from the aspect ratio of the TV may
cause image retention. Always endeavour to avoid black borders top or bottom by using the zoom function. This will help eliminate the
black borders and fit the picture to the entire area of the screen. Using a video game console may cause image retention and is not
recommended. When using a PC input, avoid displaying still images for long durations and reduce the brightness or contrast settings to
decrease the intensity of the picture.
IMPORTANT:
Image retention issues are not covered by your Samsung® warranty.
Digital TV (DVB-T) Notice
Functionalities related to Digital TV(DVB) are only available in countries/areas where DVB-T (MPEG2 and MPEG4 AVC)
digital terrestrial signals are broadcasted or where you are able to access to a compatible DVB-C(MPEG2 and MPEG4
AAC) cable- TV service. Please check with your local dealer the possibility to receive DVB-T or DVB-C signal.
DVB-T is the DVB European consortium standard for the broadcast transmission of digital terrestrial television and
DVBC is that for the broadcast transmission of digital TV over cable. However, some differentiated features like EPG
(Electric Programme Guide), VOD (Video on Demand) and so on, are not included in this specification. So, they cannot be
workable at this moment.
Although this TV set meets the latest DVB-T and DVB-C standards, as of [August, 2008], the compatibility with future
DVB-T digital terrestrial and DVB-C digital cable broadcasts cannot be guaranteed.
Depending on the countries/areas where this TV set is used some cable-TV providers may charge an additional fee for
such a service and you may be required to agree to terms and conditions of their business.
Some Digital TV functions might be unavailable in some countries or regions and DVB-C might not work correctly with
some cable service providers.
For more information, please contact your local Samsung customer care centre.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 2 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:33
English
Trademark & Label License Notice
TruSurround HD, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround HD technology is
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
DivX® Certified to play DivX® video, including premium content.
Symbol
Note
One-Touch Button
TOOL Button
Press
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 3 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:33
English
Contents
Getting Started
6 Installing the Stand
6 Disconnecting the Stand
7 Installing the Wall Mount Kit
7 Assembling the Cables
8 Anti-Theft Kensington Lock
8 Preparing before installing Wall-Mount
8 Securing the Installation Space
9 Securing the TV to the Wall
10 Accessories
11 Viewing the Control Panel
12 Viewing the Connection Panel
14 Connections
15 Mini Remote Control
15 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
16 Viewing the Remote Control
Basic Operation
17 Placing Your Television in Standby Mode
17 Plug & Play Feature
18 Viewing the Display
Using the Menus
19 Viewing the Menus
19 Channel Menu
19 Country
Auto Store
20 Manual Store
Cable Search Option (depending on the
country)
21 Full Guide / Mini Guide / Default Guide
22 Channel List
23 Channel Mode
Fine Tune
24 Picture Menu
24 Mode
Backlight / Contrast / Brightness / Sharpness /
Colour / Tint(G/R)
Advanced Settings
25 Picture Options
27 Picture Reset
Auto Adjustment
Screen
28 Sound Menu
28 Mode
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD
Audio Language
Audio Format
Audio Description
Auto Volume
Speaker Select
29 Sound Select
Sound Reset
30 Setup Menu
30 Language
Time
31 Broadcast
32 Security
Network
General
35 Network Connection
37 Setting the Network
37 Network Type
Network Setup
40 Input Menu
40 Source List
Edit Name
41 Support menu
41 Legal Notice
Product Guide
Self Diagnosis
42 Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Media Play - USB Device
43 Connecting a USB Device
44 Media Play Function
45 Sorting the Photo List
47 Viewing a Photo or Slide Show
49 Sorting the Music List
50 Playing a Music
52 Sorting the Movie List
53 Playing a Movie File
56 Using the Setup Menu
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 4 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:33
English
Media Play-DLNA
57 Setting the DLNA Network
58 Installing the DLNA Application
59 Using the DLNA Application
61 Using the DLNA Function
Anynet+
62 Connecting Anynet+ Devices
63 Setting Up Anynet+
63 Switching between Anynet+ Devices
65 Recording
65 Listening through a Receiver (Home Theatre)
66 Troubleshooting for Anynet+
Content Library
67 Using the Content Library
68 Using the Contents
69 Using the Content Management
Internet@TV
70 Getting Started with Internet@TV
73 Using the Profile Widget
74 Using the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery
75 Using the Yahoo!® Weather Widget
75 Using the Yahoo!® News Widget
76 Using the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget
77 Using the Yahoo!® Finance Widget
77 Troubleshooting for Internet@TV
78 Help Website
Home Network Centre
79 About the Home Network Centre
79 Connecting to the Home Network Centre
80 Setting Up the Home Network Centre
81 Using the Message Function
82 Using the Media Function
Other Information
83 Teletext Feature
84 Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
85 Troubleshooting: Before Contacting
Service Personnel
86 Specifications
Warning! Important Safety Instructions
Wiring the Mains Power Supply Plug (UK Only)
Warranty Card
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 5 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:33
English Getting Started
Getting Started
Installing the Stand
1
Attach your LED TV to the stand.
Two or more people should carry the TV.
Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when assembling
them.
To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level, do not apply excess
downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV.
2
Fasten screws at position 1 and then fasten screws at position 2.
Stand the product up and fasten the screws. If you fasten the screws with the LED
TV placed down, it may lean to one side.
The stand is installed for models with the screen size of 37 inch and above.
■
■
■
■
■
Disconnecting the Stand
1
Remove four screws from the back of the TV.
2
Separate the stand from the TV.
Two or more people should carry the TV.
3
Cover the bottom hole with the cover.
■
1 2 3
1
2
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 6 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:35
English Getting Started
Installing the Wall Mount Kit
Wall mount items (sold separately) allow you to mount the TV on the wall.
For detailed information on installing the wall mount, see the instructions provided with the Wall
Mount items. Contact a technician for assistance when installing the wall mounted bracket.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any damage to the product or injury to yourself or
others if you elect to install the TV on your own.
Do not install your Wall Mount Kit while your TV is turned on. It may result in personal
injury due to electric shock.
Remove the stand and cover the bottom hole with a cap and fasten with two screws.
■
■
Assembling the Cables
Stand Type
Enclose the cables in the Holder-Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand.
Wall-Mount Type
■
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 7 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:39
English Getting Started
Anti-Theft Kensington Lock
The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public
place. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the
manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for proper use.
The locking device has to be purchased separately.
The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
1
Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LED TV (1) and turn it in
the locking direction (2).
2
Connect the Kensington Lock cable (3).
3
Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object.
■
■
Preparing before installing Wall-Mount
To install a wall-mount, use the Holder-Ring 1.
Case A. Installing the SAMSUNG Wall-Mount Case B. Installing another company’s Wall-Mount
Securing the Installation Space
Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept.
When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling.
If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal
temperature of the product due to poor ventilation.
The appearance may differ depending on the product.
When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall-mount
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm 10 cm
10 cm
■
■
3
1
2
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 8 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:42
English Getting Started
Securing the TV to the Wall
Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall.
In particular, ensure your children do not hang over or destabilize the TV;
doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or death.
Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For
added stability, install the anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows.
To avoid the TV from falling:
1
Put the screws into the clamps and firmly fasten them onto the wall. Confirm that the
screws have been firmly installed onto the wall.
You may need additional material such as an anchor depending on the type of
wall.
Since the necessary clamps, screws, and string are not supplied, please
purchase these additionally.
2
Remove the screws from the centre back of the TV, put the screws into the clamps,
and then fasten the screws onto the TV again.
Screws may not be supplied with the product. In this case, please purchase the
screws of the following specifications.
Screw Specifications:
For a 32 ~ 40 Inch LED TV: M6 X L15
For a 40 ~ 55 inch LED TV : M8 X L30
3
Connect the clamps fixed onto the TV and the clamps fixed onto the wall with a strong
string and then tie the string tightly.
Install the TV near to the wall so that it does not fall backwards.
It is safe to connect the string so that the clamps fixed on the wall are equal to or
lower than the clamps fixed on the TV.
Untie the string before moving the TV.
4
Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any
sign of fatigue for failure. If you have any doubt about the security of your connections,
contact a professional installer.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Wall
Wall
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 9 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:4410
English Getting Started
Accessories
Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
Remote Control & Batteries
(AAA x 2)
Mini Remote Control &
Batteries (3V)
Cover-Bottom Cleaning Cloth
User Manual Stand Screw X 5 Programme CD
Holder-Wire Cable
(Depending on the model)
Component Cable SCART Cable Holder-Ring (4ea) Holder-Wire Stand
Holder-Wire (3ea) AV Cable
■
The items colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance.
■
■
(M4 X L10)
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 10 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:4511
English Getting Started
Viewing the Control Panel
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
The front panel buttons can be activated by touching it with your finger.
■
■
Speakers
Aim the remote control towards
this spot on the TV.
Press to turn the TV on and off.
Toggles between all the available input
sources.
In the on-screen menu, use this button as
you would use the ENTERE button on
the remote control.
Press to see an on-screen
menu of your TV’s features.
Press to increase or decrease the
volume. In the on-screen menu, use
the Ybuttons as you would use
the ◄ and ► buttons on the remote
control.
Press to change channels. In the
buttons as you would use the
on-screen menu, use the z
▼ and ▲ buttons on the remote
control.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 11 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:461
English Getting Started
Viewing the Connection Panel
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
1 KENSINGTON LOCK (depending on the model)
The Kensington Lock (optional) is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place. If you want to use a
locking device, contact the dealer where you purchased the TV.
The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model.
When connecting, use the appropriate connector.
2 LAN
Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network.
3 ANT IN
Connects to an antenna or cable TV system.
4 EXT (RGB)
Inputs or outputs for external devices, such as VCR, DVD, video game device or video disc players.
When connecting, use the appropriate connector.
In EXT Mode, DTV Out supports MPEG SD Video and Audio only.
Input/Output Specification
Connector
Input Output
Video Audio (L / R) RGB Video + Audio (L / R)
EXT O O O Only TV or DTV output is available.
■
■
■
■
■
■
1 2 3 4 5 6
9
0
!
0
@
#
7
8
[TV Rear Panel]
Power Input
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 12 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:461
English Getting Started
5 AV IN [VIDEO] / [R-AUDIO-L]
Video and audio inputs for external devices, such as a camcorder or VCR.
When connecting, use the appropriate connector.
6 COMPONENT IN
Connects Component video / audio.
When connecting, use the appropriate connector.
7 PC IN
Connects to the video output jacks on your PC.
If your PC supports an HDMI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3 or 4 terminal.
If your PC supports a DVI connection, you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) / PC/DVI AUDIO IN terminal.
8 PC/DVI AUDIO IN
Connect to the audio output jack on your PC.
DVI audio outputs for external devices.
9 HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2, 3, 4
Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output.
No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection.
Use an HDMI cable which is smaller than 14mm.
What is HDMI?
HDMI(High-Definition Multimedia Interface), is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video
signals using a single cable.
The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller than DVI’s one.
The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal colour when DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box
/ Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) supporting HDMI versions older than 1.3 are connected. When connecting an older HDMI
cable and there is no sound, connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack and the audio cables to the PC/ DVI AUDIO
IN jacks on the back of the TV. If this happens, contact the company that provided the DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box /
Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) to confirm the HDMI version, then request an upgrade.
Use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack for DVI connection to an external device. Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI-HDMI adapter (DVI to
HDMI) for video connection and the PC/DVI AUDIO IN jacks for audio. When using an HDMI / DVI cable connection, you must
use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
HDMI cables that are not 1.3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display.
0 USB1(HDD) / USB2
Connector for software upgrades and Media Play, etc.
You can connect to Samsung’s network wirelessly using the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ (Sold separately).
For USB HDD, use the USB1 (HDD) port.
! DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)
Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theatre receiver.
When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack: Decrease the volume of the TV and
adjust the volume level with the system’s volume control.
5.1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1CH.
When the receiver (home theatre) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a
DTV(air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theatre receiver. When the source is a digital component such
as a DVD / Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound
will be heard from the Home Theatre receiver. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the digital audio out jack on DVD /
Blu-ray player / Cable Box / Satellite receiver (Set-Top Box) directly to an Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV.
@ COMMON INTERFACE Slot
Insert CI (Common Interface) card into the slot.
When not inserting ‘CI CARD’ in some channels, ‘Scrambled Signal’ is displayed on the screen.
The pairing information containing a telephone number, CI CARD ID, Host ID and other information will be displayed in about
2~3 minutes. If an error message is displayed, please contact your service provider.
When the channel information configuration has finished, the message ‘Updating Completed’ is displayed, indicating that the
channel list is now updated.
You must obtain a CI CARD from a local cable service provider. Remove the CI CARD by carefully pulling it out with
your hands since dropping the CI CARD may cause damage to it.
Insert the CI-Card in the direction marked on it.
The place of the COMMON INTERFACE Slot may be different depending on its model.
CAM is not supported in some countries and regions, check with your authorized dealer.
The CI+ function is only applicable to LE********P.
If you have some problems, please contact to service provider.
# EX-LINK
Connector for service only.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 13 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:461
English Getting Started
Connections
OPTICAL (Digital)
AUDIO (Analog)
Best Normal
Digital Audio connection
Digital Audio System
Using an Optical Cable
OPTICAL
HD connection
Using an HDMI Cable
HDMI OUT
Using a D-Sub Cable
AUDIO OUT PC OUT
HD connection
Using an HDMI/DVI Cable
AUDIO OUT DVI OUT
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 14 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:471
English Getting Started
Mini Remote Control
The Mini Remote Control is a simplified remote control that consists of the power,
channel and volume buttons only.
1
Television Standby button.
This button only works when you press it for longer than 1.5 seconds.
2 < : Next channel / > : Previous channel
3
+ : Volume up / – : Volume down
4
IrDA transmitter
Use the Mini Remote Control so that this part faces the TV.
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Normal Remote Control
1
Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure.
2
Install two AAA size batteries.
Make sure to match the ‘+’ and ‘–’ ends of the batteries with the diagram inside
the compartment.
3
Replace the cover.
Remove the batteries and store them in a cool, dry place if you won’t be using
the remote control for a long time. (Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries
should last for about one year.) OPERATION
Mini Remote Control
1
Turn the battery cover counterclockwise to unlock it and then separate the battery
cover.
2
Insert the corresponding 3V Lithium battery.
3
Place the battery cover into the remote control aligning it with the grooves and then
turn the battery cover clockwise to lock the cover.
If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following:
Is the TV power on?
Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
Are the batteries drained?
Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?OPERATION
■
■
■
■
■
■
1
4
2
3
2
3
OPEN
CLOSE
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 15 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:481
English Getting Started
Teletext Functions (p. 83)
0 Teletext mode selection
(LIST / FLOF) 5 Teletext reveal 3 Teletext previous page
8 Teletext store : Exit from the Teletext display 6 Teletext index
4 Teletext size selection 1 Teletext sub page 9 Teletext hold
Colour buttons Fastext topic selection 2 Teletext next page 7 Teletext cancel
Viewing the Remote Control
You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV.
The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light.
The product colour and shape may vary depending on the model.
■
■
■
Turns the TV on and off.
Press to change the channel.
Press to switch to your
favourites channels. (p. 22)
Press to display information
on the TV screen. (p. 18)
Displays the main on-screen
menu.
Use to quickly select frequently
used functions.
Press to use various internet
services to view useful formation
and entertaining content. (p. 70)
Use these buttons in the
Channel list, Internet@TV,
Media Play menu, etc.
Press to increase or decrease
the volume.
Alternately select Teletext,
Double, or Mix. (p. 83)
Displays the Channel List on
screen. (p. 22)
Use these buttons in the Media
Play and Anynet+ modes. (∏:
This remote can be used to control
recording on Samsung recorders
with the Anynet+ feature)
Selects the TV mode directly.
(p. 83)
Pressing the ON/OFF @ light
button toggles between on and
off. When the remote control is
on, and a button is pressed on
the remote control, the remote
control buttons will be lit for a
moment. (Using the remote
control with the ON/OFF @
light button set to On will reduce
the battery usage time.)
Enables you to return to the
previous channel you were
watching.
Displays the Electronic
Programme Guide (EPG).
(p. 21)
Returns to the previous menu.
Use to select on-screen menu
items and change menu values.
Press to exit the menu.
Press to change channels.
Press to display and select the
available video sources. (p. 40)
Press to temporarily cut off the
sound. (p. 41)
Allows you to play music files,
pictures, and movies. (p. 44)
This function enables you to
view the Content Library. (p. 61)
Displays the Digital subtitle.
(p. 31)
Audio Description selection.
(p. 28)
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 16 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:481
English Basic Operation
Basic Operation
Placing Your Television in Standby Mode
Your set can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. The standby mode can be useful when
you wish to interrupt viewing temporarily (during a meal, for example).
Plug & Play Feature
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically and
subsequently.
1
Press the POWERP button.
You can also use the POWERP button on the TV.
The message Select the OSD Language. is displayed.
2
Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate language by pressing the
▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice.
3
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Store Demo or Home Use, then the
ENTERE button.
We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your
home environment.
Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments.
If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to
Home Use (Standard): Press the volume button on the TV. When the volume
OSD is displayed, press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds.
4
Press the ENTERE button. Select the appropriate country by pressing the
▲ or ▼ button. Press the ENTERE button to confirm your choice.
5
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Air or Cable, then press the ENTERE button.
Air: Air antenna signal.
Cable: Cable antenna signal.
6
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the channel source to memorize.
Press the ENTERE button to select Start.
When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to
set a value for the digital channel search. For more information, refer to pages
19~20..
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue channels.
Digital: Digital channels.
Analogue: Analogue channels.
The channel search will start and end automatically.
7
Press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Auto, then press
the ENTERE button.
If you select Manual, Set current date and time is displayed.
If you have received a digital signal, the time will be set automatically. If not,
select Manual to set the clock.
8
The description for the connection method providing the best HD screen quality is
displayed. Check the description and press the ENTERE button.
9
Press the ◄ or ► button to select See Product Guide or Watch TV. Press the
ENTERE button.
See Product Guide: You are moved to the Product Guide where you can
view the introduction to the main functions of your new HDTV.
Watch TV: You can watch the set broadcasting channel.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Press the ENTEREbutton
at any time to interrupt the
memorization process.
■
1
Press the POWERP button on the remote control.
The screen is turned off and a red standby indicator appears on your set.
2
To switch your set back on, simply press the POWERP button again.
Do not leave your set in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on holiday, for example). It is best to
unplug the set from the mains and aerial.
■
■
Select the OSD Language.
Menu Language : English ▶
E Enter
Plug & Play
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 17 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:481
English Basic Operation
If you want to reset this feature...
1
Press the MENU button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
2
Press the ENTERE button again to select Plug & Play.
3
Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
The default PIN number of a new TV set is ‘0-0-0-0’.
If you want to change PIN number, use the Change PIN function.
Viewing the Display
The display identifies the current channel and the status of certain audio-video
settings.
1
Press the INFO button on the remote control.
The TV will display the channel, the type of sound, and the status of certain picture
and sound settings.
Press the INFO button once more or wait approximately 10 seconds and the
display disappears automatically.
■
■
■
The Plug & Play feature is only
available in the TV mode.
■
Press the INFO button to viewing
the information.
■
DTV Air
15
abc1
18:00 ~ 6:00
18:11 Thu 6 Jan
Life On Venus Avenue
Unclassified
No Detaild Information
E Watch
' Information
Plug & Play ▶
Language : English
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
Setup
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 18 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:481
English Using the Menus
Using the Menus
Viewing the Menus
Menu provides one button access for controlling your TV. It enables you to perform a variety of tasks intuitively with a control
panel on the screen rather than a variety of remote control button presses.
Operation the Menu
The access step may differ depending on the selected menu.
1
Press the MENU button.
The menu is displayed on the screen.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select one of the icons.
Press the ENTERE button to access the icon’s sub-menu.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to items in the menu.
Press the ENTERE button to enter items in the menu.
4
Press the ▲/▼/◄/► button to change the selected items.
Press the RETURNR button to return to the previous menu.
5
Press the EXITe button to exit from the menu.
■
Channel Menu
Channel
Option Description
Country Analogue Channel
You can change the country for analogue channels.
Digital Channel
You can change the country for digital channels.
The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit
PIN number.
❑
❑
Auto Store You can scan for the frequency ranges available to you
(and availability depends on your country). Automatically
allocated programme numbers may not correspond to
actual or desired programme numbers.
Scans for all channels with active broadcast stations and
stores them in the TV’s memory.
If a channel is locked using the
Child Lock function, the PIN
input window appears.
■
Country ▶
Auto Store
Manual Store
Cable Search Option
Full Guide
Mini Guide
Default Guide : Full Guide
Channel List
Channel
MENU button
Display the main on-screen menu.
ENTERE/ Direction button
Move the cursor and select an item.
Select the currently selected item.
Confirm the setting.
RETURN button
Return to the previous menu.
EXIT button
Exit the on-screen menu.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 19 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:490
English Using the Menus
Channel
Option Description
Auto Store Air / Cable
Antenna source to memorize
Digital & Analogue: Digital and Analogue
channels.
Digital: Digital channels.
Analogue: Analogue channels.
When selecting Cable → Digital & Analogue
or Cable → Digital:
Provide a value to scan for cable channels.
Search Mode → Full / Network /Quick
Quick
Network ID: Displays the network
identification code.
Frequency: Displays the frequency
for the channel. (Differs in each
country)
Modulation: Displays available
modulation values.
Symbol Rate: Displays available
symbol rates.
❑
■
■
■
■
■
Manual Store Scans for a channel manually and stores it in the TV’s
memory.
Digital Channel
Manual store for digital channels.
Channel: Set the Channel number using the ▲, ▼ or
number (0~9) buttons.
Frequency: Set the frequency using the number buttons.
Bandwidth: Set the bandwidth using the ▲, ▼ or
number (0~9) buttons.
When it has finished, channels are updated in the channel
list.
Analogue Channel
Manual store for analogue channel.
Programme (Programme number to be assigned to a
channel): Sets the programme number using the ▲, ▼
or number (0~9) buttons.
Colour System → Auto / PAL / SECAM / NTSC4.43:
Sets the colour system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
Sound System → BG / DK / I / L: Sets the sound
system value using the ▲ or ▼ button.
Channel (When you know the number of the channel
to be stored): Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select C (Air
channel) or S (Cable channel). Press the ► button, then
press the ▲, ▼ or number (0~9) buttons to select the
required number.
You can also select the channel number directly by
pressing the number (0~9) buttons.
If there is abnormal sound or no sound, reselect
the sound standard required.
Search (When you do not know the channel numbers):
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to start the search. The tuner
scans the frequency range until the first channel or the
channel that you selected is received on the screen.
Store (When you store the channel and associated
programme number): Set to OK by pressing the
ENTERE button.
❑
■
■
■
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
Cable Search Option
(depending on the
country)
Sets additional search options such as the frequency and
symbol rate for cable network searches.
Freq.Start (Frequency Start): Set the start frequency
(Differs in each country)
Freq.Stop (Frequency Stop): Set the stop frequency
(Differs in each country)
Modulation: Displays available modulation values.
Symbol Rate: Displays available symbol rates.
■
■
■
■
If a channel is locked using the
Child Lock function, the PIN
input window appears.
Digital Channel is only available
in DTV mode.
■
■
Analogue Channel is only
available in analogue TV mode.
Channel mode
P (Programme mode):
When completing tuning, the
broadcasting stations in your
area have been assigned
to position numbers from
P00 to P99. You can select
a channel by entering the
position number in this
mode.
C (Air channel mode):
You can select a channel
by entering the assigned
number to each air
broadcasting station in this
mode.
S (Cable channel mode):
You can select a channel
by entering the assigned
number for each cable
channel in this mode.
■
■
If you want to stop Auto Store,
press the ENTERE button.
The Stop Auto Store? message
will be displayed. Select Yes by
pressing the ◄ or ► button, then
press the ENTERE button.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 20 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:491
English Using the Menus
Channel
Option Description
Full Guide /
Mini Guide /
Default Guide
The EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) information is
provided by the broadcasters. Programme entries may
appear blank or out of date as a result of the information
broadcast on a given channel. The display will dynamically
update as soon as new information becomes available.
Full Guide
Displays the programme information as time ordered One
hour segments. Two hours of programme information is
displayed which may be scrolled forwards or backwards in
time.
❑
Mini Guide
The information of each programme is displayed by each
line on the current channel Mini Guide screen from the
current programme onwards according to the programme
starting time order.
Default Guide → Mini Guide / Full Guide
You can decide whether to display either the Mini Guide
or the Full Guide when the GUIDE button on the remote
control is pressed.
❑
❑
Using the Full / Mini Guide
To... Then...
Watch a programme in the EPG list Select a programme by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
Exit the guide Press the Blue button
If the next programme is selected, it is scheduled with the clock icon displayed. If the ENTERE button is pressed again, press the
◄, ► button to select Cancel Schedules, the scheduling is cancelled with the clock icon gone.
View programme information
Select a programme of your choice by pressing the ▲, ▼, ◄, ► button.
Then press the INFO button when the programme of your choice is highlighted.
The programme title is on the upper part of the screen centre.
Please click on INFO button for the detailed information. Channel Number, Running Time, Status Bar, Parental Level, Video Quality
Information (HD / SD), Sound Modes, Subtitle or Teletext, languages of Subtitle or Teletext and brief summary of the highlighted
programme are included on the detailed information. “...” will be appeared if the summary is long.
Toggle between the Mini Guide and Full Guide Press the Red button repeatedly.
In Full Guide
Scrolls backwards quickly (24 hours).
Scrolls forwards quickly (24 hours).
Press the Green button repeatedly.
Press the Yellow button repeatedly.
In Mini Guide
Display previous page quickly.
Display next page quickly.
Press the Green button.
Press the Yellow button.
You can also display the guide
menu simply by pressing the
GUIDE button. (To configure
the Default Guide, refer to the
descriptions.)
■
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8
0
9
P
(Red)
Full Guide
E Watch Information Mini Guide +24 Hours Exit
DTV Cable 900 f tn 2:10 Tue 1 Jun
Freshmen On Campus
2:00 - 2:30
No Detailed Information
Today 2:00 - 3:00 3:00 - 4:00
Mint Extra
Loaded
40 with Dynamite MC
The Distillery
Smash Hits! Sunday
900 f tn
901 ITV Play
902 Kerrang!
903 Kiss
904 oneword
▼ 905 Hits
Street Hypn..
Kisstory
No Information
No Information
No Information
Freshmen O..
900
E Watch Information Full Guide Next Page Exit
Mini Guide DTV Cable 900 f tn
Street Hypnosis
Booze Britain
2:00
2:30
5:00
Freshmen On Campus
▼
Full Guide
Mini Guide
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 21 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:50
English Using the Menus
Channel
Option Description
Channel List Using this menu, you can add / delete or set favourites
channels and use the programme guide for digital
broadcasts.
All Channels
Shows all currently available channels.
Added Channels
Shows all added channels.
Favourites
Shows all favourite channels.
Programmed
Shows all current reserved programmes.
Select a channel in the All Channels, Added Channels
or Favourites screen by pressing the ▲ / ▼ buttons, and
pressing the ENTERE button. Then you can watch the
selected channel.
Using the Colour buttons with the Channel List
Red (Channel Type): Toggle between your TV, Radio,
Data / Other and All.
Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel number.
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.
You can perform the add/delete or add to favourites/
delete from favourites function for multiple channels at
the same time. Select the required channels and press
the Yellow button to set all the selected channels at
the same time. The c mark appears to the left of the
selected channels.
Channel List Option Menu (in All Channels /
Added Channels / Favourites)
Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
Option menu items may differ depending on the channel
status.
Add / Delete
You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you
want.
All deleted channels will be shown on All Channels
menu.
You can also delete a channel to the Added Channels or
Favourites menu in the same manner.
Add to Favourite / Delete from Favourite
You can set channels you watch frequently as favourites.
Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu.
You can also set the add to (or delete from) Favourite by
selecting Tools → Add to Favourite (or Delete from
Favourite).
The “*” symbol will be displayed and the channel will
be set as a favourite.
All favourite channels will be shown on Favourites
menu.
Lock / Unlock
You can lock a channel so that the channel cannot be
selected and viewed.
This function is available only when the Child Lock is set
to On.
The PIN number input screen appears. Enter your 4 digit
PIN number.
The default PIN number of a new TV set is “0-0-0-0”. You
can change the PIN, by selecting Change PIN from the
menu.
The “\” symbol will be displayed and the channel will be
locked.
❑
❑
❑
❑
■
■
■
■
■
❑
■
■
❑
T
■
■
❑
■
■
■
■
A gray-coloured channel
indicates the channel has been
deleted.
The Add menu only appears for
deleted channels.
■
■
TOOLS (Tools): Displays
the Delete (or Add), Add to
Favourite (or Delete from
Favourite), Lock (or Unlock),
Timer Viewing, Edit Channel
Name, Edit Channel Number,
Sort, Select All (or Deselect
All), Auto Store menu. (The
Options menus may differ
depending on the situation.)
■
Channel Status Display Icons
A: An Analogue channel.
c: A channel selected by
pressing the Yellow button.
*: A channel set as a
Favourite.
(: A programme currently
being broadcast.
\: A locked channel.
): A reserved programme
■
You can select these options by
simply pressing the CH LIST
button on the remote control.
To select the favourites channels
you have set up, press the FAV.
CH button on the remote control.
■
■
All Channels
824 UKTV Gold
825 UKTV style
A 1 C --
A 2 C --
A 3 C --
A 4 C --
A 5 C --
A 6 C --
A 7 C --
A 8 C --
All Channel Type Zoom Select TTools
Delete
Add to Favourite
Lock
Timer Viewing
Edit Channel Name
Sort
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 22 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:50
English Using the Menus
Only Analogue TV channels can
be fine tuned.
■
The names of digital
broadcasting channels are
automatically assigned and
cannot be renamed.
■
You can only select Deselect
All when there is a selected
channel.
■
If a channel is locked using the
Child Lock function, the PIN
input window appears.
■
Only memorized channels can
be reserved.
■
Programmed
1 / 1 / 2009
13:59 5 TV1 )
18:59 2 TV3 ) The Equalizer
20:59 2 TV3 ) McMillan & Wife
21:59 2 TV3 ) M.Spillane’s mike
All Zoom Select TTools EInformation
Change Info
Cancel Schedules
Information
Select All
Channel
Option Description
Channel List Timer Viewing
If you reserve a programme you want to watch, the channel
is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the
Channel List; even when you are watching another channel.
To reserve a programme, set the current time first.
You can set the channel, day, month, year, hour and
minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the
remote control.
Reserving a programme will be shown in the
Programmed menu.
Digital Programme Guide and Viewing Reservation:
When a digital channel is selected, and you press
the ► button, the Programme Guide for the channel
appears. You can reserve a programme according to the
procedures described above.
Edit Channel Name (analogue channels only)
Channels can be labelled so that their call letters appear
whenever the channel is selected.
Edit Channel Number (digital channels only)
You can also edit the channel number by pressing the
number buttons on the remote control.
Sort (analogue channels only)
This operation allows you to change the programme
numbers of the stored channels. This operation may be
necessary after using the auto store.
Select All / Deselect All
Select All: You can select all the channels in the
channel list.
Deselect All: You can deselect all the selected
channels.
Auto Store
For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to
pages 19~20.
Channel List Option Menu (in Programmed)
You can view, modify or delete a reservation.
Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu.
Change Info
Select to change a viewing reservation.
Cancel Schedules
Select to cancel a viewing reservation.
Information
Select to view a viewing reservation.
(You can also change the reservation information.)
Select All
Select all reserved programmes.
❑
■
■
■
❑
❑
❑
❑
■
■
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Channel Mode When press the P >/< button, Channels will be switched
within the selected channel list.
Added Ch.
Channels will be switched within the memorized channel list.
Favourite Ch.
Channels will be switched within the favourite channel list.
❑
❑
Fine Tune If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the
channel, as this is done automatically during the search and
store operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, you may
have to fine tune the channel manually.
Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked
with an asterisk ‘*’ on the right-hand side of the channel
number in the channel banner.
To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset by pressing the
▲ or ▼ button and then press the ENTERE button.
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 23 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:50
English Using the Menus
7
U Move L Adjust E Enter R Return
▲
Backlight
▼
Picture Menu
Picture
Option Description
Mode Selects the type of picture settings that best correspond to
your viewing preferences or requirements. Presets a higher
brightness, contrast, and sharpness to the picture.
Dynamic
Recommended for use in bright room conditions.
Standard
Recommended for use in a normal viewing condition.
Natural
Adds more punch and contrast to the image than the
Standard mode.
Movie
Corresponding to the conditions used in movie,
recommended for use in darker viewing conditions.
■
■
■
■
Backlight /
Contrast /
Brightness /
Sharpness /
Colour /
Tint(G/R)
Your television has several setting options that allow you to
control the picture quality.
Backlight
Adjusts the brightness of LED back light.
Contrast
Increases or decreases the brightness in white areas of the
picture. Too little contrast and the picture may seem dark;
too much contrast and the picture will lose details in white
images.
Brightness
Increases or decreases the overall brightness of the
picture, but best used to adjust the black level of the image.
Too little brightness and shadow detail will be lost; too much
brightness and blacks will be gray and washed out.
Sharpness
Increases or decreases the apparent detail in the picture.
Too little sharpness and the image might look soft. Too
much sharpness can add false edges to objects or can
make noise more noticeable.
Colour
Increases or decreases colour saturation levels in the
picture. Too little colour and the image will be black and
white (undersaturated); too much colour and the image will
look oversaturated and cartoonish.
Tint(G/R)
Changes the picture hue from reddish to a greenish
appearance.
■
■
■
■
■
■
Advanced Settings Samsung’s new TVs allow you to make even more precise
picture settings than previous models.
Black Tone → Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest
Increases the picture’s shadow detail by lightening the
black level (ie changing the gamma) at low levels. This is
most commonly used for watching movies with dark scenes
to keep the picture from appearing washed out in bright
rooms.
Dynamic Contrast → Off / Low / Medium / High
Increases or decreases the difference between the
brightest and darkest portions of the image with changing
scenes. Shadows are more visible with dark scenes, while
contrast is enhanced with bright scenes.
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You
can also set the picture mode
by selecting Tools → Picture
Mode.
■
Only analogue TV, Ext., AV
modes of the PAL system,
you cannot use the Tint(G/R)
Function.
When you make changes to
Backlight, Contrast, Brightness,
Sharpness, Colour or Tint(G/
R), the OSD will be adjusted
accordingly.
In PC mode, you can only make
changes to Backlight, Contrast
and Brightness.
Settings can be adjusted and
stored for each external device
you have connected to an input
of the TV.
The energy consumed during use
can be significantly reduced if the
brightness level of the picture is
lowered, which will reduce the
overall running cost.
■
■
■
■
■
Mode : Standard ▶
Backlight : 7
Contrast : 95
Brightness : 45
Sharpness : 50
Colour : 50
Tint (G/R) : G50/R50
Advanced Settings
Picture
Natural is not available in PC
mode.
■
Black Tone : Off ▶
Dynamic Contrast : Medium
Gamma : 0
Colour Space : Native
White Balance
Flesh Tone : 0
Edge Enhancement : On
U Move E Enter R Return
Advanced Settings
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 24 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:50
English Using the Menus
Picture
Option Description
Advanced Settings Gamma
Changes the rate at which images ramp or fade from light
to dark. Recommended for advanced users only.
Colour Space
Increases or decreases the visible colour range for red,
green and blue. Recommended for advanced users only.
Auto: The TV will choose the colour range that
is closest to the range used during TV and movie
production.
Native: Displays the most enhanced, vibrant
colours possible.
Custom: Provides precise saturation and colour
point adjustment of Red, Green, Blue, Yellow,
Cyan, and Magenta. Recommended for advanced
users only.
White Balance
You can adjust the colour temperature for more natural
picture colours.
R, G, B-Offset: Fine tunes the white balance, or
colour ‘temperature’ in dark areas by changing the
individual values of R, G, B. Recommended for
advanced users only.
R, G, B-Gain: Fine tunes the white balance, or
colour ‘temperature’ in the light areas by changing
the individual values of R, G, B. Recommended for
advanced users only.
Reset: Resets the colour space to the default
values.
Flesh Tone
Adjusts the colour of flesh tones. Increasing the value
creates a more reddish picture. Decreasing the value
creates a more greenish picture.
Edge Enhancement
Increases or decreases the emphasis at object edges.
xvYCC
Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and colour
space when watching movies from an external device (ie.
DVD player) connected to the HDMI or Component IN
jacks.
■
■
■
■
■
■
Picture Options Colour Tone
Selects a preset white balance, or ‘colour temperature’
setting, to provide either a reddish or bluish hue, dependant
upon your personal preference.
Cool: Selects a white balance, or colour
‘temperature’ with a bluish hue. Skin tones may
have less warmth but whites will seem brighter.
Recommended when watching normal TV
broadcasting in a bright room.
Normal: Selects the white balance, or colour
“temperature” with a less bluish, more reddish hue.
Suitable for most viewing environments and programs.
Warm1, Warm2, Warm3: Selects a redder, warmer
hue that more closely matches the setting on monitors
used in the production of TV and movie content.
Recommended when watching movie and dramatic
TV content. The lowest setting is best used for black &
white content.
■
Advanced Settings is available in
Standard or Movie mode.
In PC mode, you can only make
changes to Dynamic Contrast,
Gamma and White Balance from
among the Advanced Settings
items.
Colour is available when Colour
Space is set to Custom.
In Colour, you can adjust the RGB
values for the selected colour.
To reset the adjusted RGB value,
select Reset.
■
■
■
■
■
xvYCC is available when the
picture mode is set to Movie, and
the external input is set to HDMI or
Component mode.
This function may not be
supported depending on your
external device.
■
■
In PC mode, you can only make
changes to the Colour Tone and
Size from among the items in
Picture Options.
Warm1, Warm2 or Warm3 is
only activated when the picture
mode is Movie.
■
■
Colour Tone : Normal ▶
Size : Auto Wide
Screen Mode : 16:9
Digital NR : Auto
HDMI Black Level : Normal
Film Mode : Off
100Hz Motion Plus : Standard
▼
U Move E Enter R Return
Picture Options
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 25 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:51
English Using the Menus
Picture
Option Description
Picture Options Size
Changes the screen shape in terms of height and width.
Also known as Aspect Ratio.
Auto Wide: Enables the correct picture size to
match the original video signal.
16:9: Sets the picture aspect ratio to fill the screen.
Wide Zoom: Enlarges the middle part of the
picture.
Zoom: Magnifies the picture contents horizontally
and vertically.
4:3: Sets the picture aspect ratio to 4:3 with black
or gray side bars.
Screen Fit: Matches every pixel of the original
image to a pixel on the TV screen (aka 1:1 pixel
mapping) to show the entire image.
Wide Zoom: Press the ► button to select
Position, then press the ENTERE button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move the picture up /
down. Then press the ENTERE button.
Zoom: Press the ► button to Select Position,
then press the ENTERE button. Press the ▲ or
▼ button to move the picture up and down. Then
press the ENTERE button. Press the ► button
to Select Size, then press the ENTERE button.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to magnify or reduce the
picture size in the vertical direction. Then press the
ENTERE button.
After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i / 1080p)
or Component (1080i / 1080p) mode: Select
Position by pressing the ◄ or ► button. Use the
▲, ▼, ◄ or ► button to move the picture.
Reset: Press the ◄ or ► button to select Reset,
then press the ENTERE button. You can initialize
the setting.
If you use the Screen Fit function with HDMI 720p
input, 1 line will be cut at the top, bottom, left and
right as in the Overscan function.
When Double (À, Œ) mode has been set in PIP,
the Picture Size cannot be set.
Screen Mode
When setting the picture size to Auto Wide in a 16:9 wide
TV, you can determine the picture size you want to see the
4:3 WSS (Wide Screen Service) image or nothing. Each
individual European country requires different picture size
so this function is intended for users to select it.
16:9: Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode.
Wide Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture more
than 4:3.
Zoom: Magnify the size of the picture vertically on
screen.
4:3: Sets the picture to 4:3 normal mode.
Digital NR → Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto
Can reduce the grain effect or level of video snow seen in
images coming from poor quality sources.
HDMI Black Level → Normal / Low
Adjusts the black level in the picture according to the type
of signal being transmitted through HDMI.
Film Mode
Applies the appropriate video processing needed to
achieve the best picture quality for watching movies.
Off: Turn the Film Mode function off.
Auto1: Improves the picture quality for fast motion
scenes.
Auto2: Allows a smoother text motion on fast
motion scenes.
■
●
●
●
●
●
■
■
■
■
This function is active only when
an external device is connected to
the TV via HDMI (RGB signals).
■
Film Mode is supported in TV,
AV, COMPONENT(480i / 1080i)
and HDMI(480i / 1080i).
■
Depending on the input source,
the picture size options may vary.
The items available may differ
depending on the selected mode.
In PC Mode, only 16:9 and 4:3
mode can be adjusted.
Settings can be adjusted and
stored for each external device
you have connected to an input
of the TV.
Temporary image retention may
occur when viewing a static image
on the set for more than two
hours.
■
■
■
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You can
also set the size by selecting
Tools → Picture Size.
■
This function is available in Auto
Wide mode.
This function is not available in
PC, Component or HDMI mode.
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 26 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:51
English Using the Menus
Picture
Option Description
Picture Options 100Hz Motion Plus → Off / Clear / Standard / Smooth
/ Custom / Demo
Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to
provide a clearer picture.
If you enable 200 Hz Motion Plus, noise may appear on
the screen. If this occurs, set 100Hz Motion Plus to Off.
Off: Switches 100Hz Motion Plus off.
Clear: Sets 100Hz Motion Plus to minimum.
Standard: Sets 100Hz Motion Plus to medium.
Smooth: Sets 100Hz Motion Plus to maximum.
Custom: Adjusts the blur and judder reduction
level to suit your preference.
Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level
from video sources.
Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction
level from video sources when playing films.
Reset: Reset the custom settings.
Demo: Displays the difference between 100Hz
Motion Plus on and off modes.
Blue Only Mode
Helps to adjust the colour and tint controls when used with
colour bar test patterns. Recommended for qualified picture
alignment specialists only. Available only when the Picture
Mode is set to Movie or Standard.
■
●
●
●
■
Picture Reset Resets all picture settings to the default values.
Reset Picture Mode: Current picture values return to
default settings.
■
Picture (In the PC mode)
Option Description
Auto Adjustment Use the Auto Adjust function to have the TV set
automatically adjust the video signals it receives.
The function also automatically fine-tunes the settings and
adjusts the frequency values and positions.
Screen Coarse / Fine
The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or
reduce picture noise. If the noise is not removed by Finetuning alone, then adjust the frequency as best as possible
(Coarse) and Fine-tune again. After the noise has been
reduced, readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the
centre of screen.
PC Position
Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV
screen.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to adjusting the Vertical-Position.
Press the ◄ or ► button to adjust the Horizontal-Position.
Image Reset
You can replace all image settings with the factory default
values.
■
■
■
Blue Only Mode is available
when the picture mode is set to
Movie or Standard.
■
Preset: Press the SOURCE button
to select PC mode.
This function does not work in
DVI-HDMI mode.
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You can
also set the Auto Adjustment
by selecting Tools → Auto
Adjustment.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 27 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:51
English Using the Menus
Sound Menu
Sound
Option Description
Mode Standard: Selects the normal sound mode.
Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
Movie: Provides the best sound for movies.
Clear Voice: Emphasizes voice over other sounds.
Custom: Recalls your customized sound settings.
■
■
■
■
■
Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal
preferences.
Mode: Selects the sound mode among the predefined
settings.
Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and
left speaker.
100Hz / 300Hz / 1KHz / 3KHz / 10KHz (Bandwidth
Adjustment): To adjust the level of different bandwidth
frequencies.
Reset: Resets the equalizer settings to the default values.
■
■
■
■
SRS TruSurround HD SRS TruSurround HD is a patented SRS technology that
solves the problem of playing 5.1 multichannel content
over two speakers. TruSurround delivers a compelling,
virtual surround sound experience through any two-speaker
playback system, including internal television speakers.
It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats.
Audio Language You can change the default value for audio languages.
Displays the language information for the incoming stream.
While viewing a digital channel, this function can be
selected.
You can only select the language among the actual
languages being broadcast.
■
■
Audio Format When sound is emitted from both the main speaker and
the audio receiver, a sound echo may occur due to the
decoding speed difference between the main speaker
and the audio receiver. In this case, use the TV Speaker
function.
While viewing a digital channel, this function can be
selected.
The Audio Format appears according to the broadcasting
signal.
■
■
Audio Description This is an auxiliary audio function that provides an
additional audio track for visually challenged persons.
This function handles the Audio Stream for the AD (Audio
Description), when it is sent along with the Main audio from
the broadcaster. Users can turn the Audio Description On or
Off and control the volume.
Audio Description
Turn the audio description function on or off.
Volume
You can adjust the audio description volume.
Volume is active when Audio Description is set
to On.
While viewing a Digital channel, this function can
be selected.
■
■
Auto Volume Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions,
and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the
channel is changed. This feature lets you automatically
adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the
sound output when the modulation signal is high or by
raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low.
Speaker Select When you watch TV with it connecting to a Home theatre,
turn the TV speakers off so you can listen to sound from the
Home theatre’s (external) speakers.
External Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the
External (Home Theatre) Speakers.
TV Speaker: Used to listen to the sound of the TV
Speakers.
■
■
The volume buttons and MUTE
buttons do not operate when the
Speaker Select is set to External
Speaker.
If you select External Speaker
in the Speaker Select menu, the
sound settings will be limited.
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You can
also configure the sound mode
by selecting Tools → Sound
Mode.
■
Press the AD button on the
remote control to select Off or
On.
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You can
also set the SRS TruSurround
HD by selecting Tools → SRS
TS HD.
■
Mode : Custom ▶
Equalizer
SRS TruSurround HD : Off
Audio Language : ----
Audio Format : ----
Audio Description
Auto Volume : Off
Speaker Select : TV Speaker
Sound
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 28 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:51
English Using the Menus
Selecting the Speaker
TV’s Internal Speakers
Audio Out (Optical) to Sound
System
RF / AV / Component / PC / HDMI RF / AV / Component / PC / HDMI
TV Speaker Sound Output Sound Output
External
Speaker
Mute Sound Output
Video No Signal Mute Mute
Sound
Option Description
Sound Select When the PIP feature is activated, you can listen to the
sound of the sub (PIP) picture.
■ You can select this option when PIP is set to On.
Sound Reset You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults.
Reset Sound Mode: Current sound values return to default
settings.
Selecting the Sound Mode
You can set the sound mode in the Tools menu. When you set to Dual l ll, the current sound
mode is displayed on the screen.
Audio Type Dual 1 / 2 Default
A2
Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo STEREO ↔ MONO
Dual DUAL 1 ↔ DUAL 2 DUAL 1
NICAM
Stereo
Mono MONO
Automatic change
Stereo MONO ↔ STEREO
Dual
MONO ↔ DUAL 1
DUAL 2
DUAL 1
If the stereo signal is weak and an automatic switching occurs, then switch to the mono.
This function is only activated in stereo sound signal. It is deactivated in mono sound
signal.
This function is only available in TV mode.
■
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You can
also set the sound of the sub
picture by selecting Tools → PIP
→ Sound Select.
■
Sound Reset
L Move E Enter R Return
Cancel sound reset.
Reset All Reset Sound Mode Cancel
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 29 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:510
English Using the Menus
Setup Menu
Setup
Option Description
Language You can set the menu language.
Time Clock
Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer
features of the TV. If you disconnect the power cord, you have
to set the clock again.
Clock Mode
You can set up the current time manually or automatically.
Auto: Set the current time automatically using the time
from the digital broadcast.
Manual: Set the current time to a manually specified time.
Clock Set
You can set the current time manually.
This function is only available when Clock Mode is set
to Manual.
You can set the day, month, year, hour and minute
directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote
control.
Sleep Timer
The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset
time (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes).
To cancel the Sleep Timer function, select Off.
Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3
Three different on / off timer settings can be made.
You must set the clock first.
On Time
Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate.
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to
Activate.)
Off Time
Set the hour, minute, and activate / inactivate.
(To activate timer with the setting you’ve chosen, set to
Activate.)
Volume
Set the desired volume level.
Source → TV / USB
You can select the TV or USB device content to be played
when the TV turns on automatically. Select TV or USB. (Make
sure that an USB device is connected to your TV.)
Antenna (when Source is set to TV)
Select ATV or DTV.
Channel (when Source is set to TV)
Select the desired channel.
Contents (when Source is set to USB)
You can select a folder on the USB Device with music or photo
files to be played when the TV turns on automatically.
If the folder name is too long, the folder cannot be
selected.
If you are using two of the same type USB device, be
sure the folder names are different so the correct USB
is read.
Repeat
Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or
Manual.
When Manual is selected, press the ► button to select
the desired day of the week. Press the ENTERE button
over the desired day and the c mark will appear.
You can set the hour, minute and channel by pressing the
number buttons on the remote control.
❑
■
■
❑
■
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
On Time
L Move U Adjust E Enter R Return
Timer 1
Off Time
Volume
00 00 Inactivate
00 00 Inactivate
10
Source Antenna Channel
TV ATV 0
Repeat
Once
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
Auto Power Off
When you set the timer on, the
television will eventually turn off,
if no controls are operated for 3
hours after the TV was turned on
by the timer. This function is only
available in timer on mode and
prevents overheating, which may
occur if a TV is on for too long
time.
■
The current time will appear
every time you press the INFO
button.
■
Depending on the broadcast
station and signal, the auto time
may not be set correctly. If this
occurs, set the time manually.
The Antenna or cable must be
connected in order to set the time
automatically.
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You
can also set the sleep timer by
selecting Tools → Sleep Timer.
■
Plug & Play
Language : English ▶
Time
Broadcast
Security
Network
General
Setup
When there is only one photo file
in the USB the Slide Show will
not play.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 30 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:521
English Using the Menus
Setup
Option Description
Broadcast Subtitle
You can activate and deactivate the subtitles. Use this
menu to set the Subtitle Mode. Normal under the menu is
the basic subtitle and Hard of hearing is the subtitle for a
hearing-impaired person.
Subtitle
Switches subtitles on or off.
Mode
Sets the subtitle mode.
Subtitle Language
Set the subtitle language.
If the programme you are watching does not support
the Hard of hearing function, Normal automatically
activates even though Hard of hearing mode is
selected.
English is the default in cases where the selected
language is unavailable in the broadcast.
Digital Text
If the programme is broadcast with digital text, this feature
is enabled.
MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Information Coding
Experts Group)
An International standard for data encoding systems
used in multimedia and hypermedia. This is at a higher
level than the MPEG system which includes data-linking
hypermedia such as still images, character service,
animation, graphic and video files as well as multimedia
data. MHEG is user runtime interaction technology
and is being applied to various fields including VOD
(Video-On-Demand), ITV (Interactive TV), EC (Electronic
Commerce), tele-education, tele-conferencing, digital
libraries and network games.
Teletext Language
You can set the Teletext language by selecting the language
type.
English is the default in cases where the selected
language is unavailable in the broadcast.
Preference
Primary Audio Language / Secondary Audio
Language / Primary Subtitle Language / Secondary
Subtitle Language / Primary Teletext Language /
Secondary Teletext Language
Using this feature, users can select one of the languages.
The language selected here is the default when the user
selects a channel
If you change the language setting, the Subtitle
Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext Language
of the Language menu are automatically changed to the
selected language.
The Subtitle Language, Audio Language, and the Teletext
Language of the Language menu show a list of languages
supported by the current channel and the selection is
highlighted. If you change this language setting, the
new selection is only valid for the current channel. The
changed setting does not change the setting of the
Primary Subtitle Language, Primary Audio Language, or
the Primary Teletext Language of the Preference menu.
❑
■
■
■
❑
■
❑
■
❑
■
You can select these options
simply by pressing the SUBT.
button on the remote control.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 31 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:52
English Using the Menus
Child Lock is available only in
TV mode.
The default PIN number of a new
TV set is 0-0-0-0.
■
■
If you forget the PIN code, press
the remote control buttons in the
following sequence, which resets
the PIN to 0-0-0-0: POWER
(Off) → MUTE → 8 → 2 → 4 →
POWER (On).
■
Setup
Option Description
Broadcast Common Interface
CI Menu
This enables the user to select from the CAM-provided
menu.
Select the CI Menu based on the menu PC Card.
Application Info.
This contains information on CAM inserted in the CI slot
and displays it. The Application Info inserting is about the
CI CARD. You can install the CAM anytime whether the TV
is ON or OFF.
1. Purchase the CI CAM module by visiting your nearest
dealer or by phone.
2. Insert the CI CARD into the CAM in the direction of the
arrow until it fits.
3. Insert the CAM with the CI CARD installed into the
common interface slot.
(Insert the CAM in the direction of the arrow, right up to
the end so that it is parallel with the slot.)
4. Check if you can see a picture on a scrambled signal
channel.
❑
■
■
Security Child Lock
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users, such
as children, from watching unsuitable programme by muting
out video and audio.
Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input
screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from
the menu.
You can lock some channels in Channel List.
Parental Lock > Parental Rating
This feature allows you to prevent unauthorized users,
such as children, from watching unsuitable programme by
a 4-digit PIN (Personal Identification Number) code that is
defined by the user.
The Parental Rating item differs depending on the
country.
Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input
screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
You can change the PIN by selecting Change PIN from
the menu.
When the parental ratings are set, the “\” symbol is
displayed.
Allow All: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
Block All: Press to lock all TV ratings.
Change PIN
You can change your personal ID number that is required to
set up the TV.
Before the setup screen appears, the PIN number input
screen appears. Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
❑
■
■
■
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
❑
■
Network Network Type / Network Setup
For detailed procedures on setting up options, refer to
pages 37~39.
❑
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 32 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:52
English Using the Menus
Setup
Option Description
General Game Mode
When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation™
or Xbox™, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming
experience by selecting game menu.
If Game Mode is On:
Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard
and cannot be changed.
Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom
and cannot be changed. Adjust the sound using the
equalizer.
The Reset Sound function is activated. Selecting
the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets
the equalizer settings to the factory defaults.
BD Wise
Provides the optimal picture quality for SAMSUNG DVD,
Blu-ray and Home Theatre products which support BD
Wise. You can enjoy a richer picture when using them
connected to this Samsung TV.
Connect SAMSUNG products that have BD Wise using
an HDMI cable.
When the BD Wise set to On, the picture mode is
automatically changed to the optimal resolution.
BD Wise is available in HDMI mode.
Energy Saving
This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to
reduce power consumption. When watching TV at night,
set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye
fatigue as well as power consumption.
Menu Transparency
You can set the Transparency of the menu.
Melody
A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is
powered On or Off.
The Melody does not play
When no sound is output from the TV because the
MUTE button has been pressed.
When no sound is output from the TV because the
volume has been reduced to minimum with the
volume (-) button.
When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function.
Light Effect
You can turn the LED on/off on the front of TV. Turn it off to
save power or if the LED bothers you.
Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power
consumption.
Off: LED is always Off.
In Standby: LED is On when TV is turned off.
Watching TV: LED is On when watching TV.
Always: LED is always On, regardless of TV settings.
❑
■
❑
■
■
■
❑
❑
❑
■
❑
■
■
■
■
Restrictions on game mode
(Caution)
To disconnect the game
console and connect another
external device, set Game
Mode to Off in the setup
menu.
Game Mode is not available
in regular TV, PC and Ext
mode.
While PIP is in operation, the
Game Mode function cannot
be used.
If the picture is poor when
external device is connected
to TV, check if Game Mode is
On. Set Game Mode to Off and
connect external devices.
■
■
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You
can also set the Energy Saving
option by selecting Tools →
Energy Saving.
■
The colour of light may very
depending on the model.
■
LED
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 33 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:52
English Using the Menus
If you turn the TV off while watching
in PIP mode and turn it on again, the
PIP window will disappear.
You may notice that the picture in
the PIP window becomes slightly
unnatural when you use the main
screen to view a game or karaoke.
While Internet@TV is in operation,
the PIP function cannot be used.
■
■
■
PIP : On ▶
Size : Õ
Position : Ã
Channel : ATV 4
U Move E Enter R Return
PIP
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You
can also configure PIP related
settings by selecting Tools →
PIP.
■
Setup
Option Description
General PIP
You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the
TV tuner and one external video source. This product has
one built-in tuner, which does not allow PIP to function in
the same mode. Please see ‘PIP Settings’ below for details.
If you select the PIP picture sound, refer to page 29.
PIP
You can activate or deactivate the PIP function.
Size → Õ / à / À / Œ
You can select a size of the sub-picture.
Position → à / – / — / œ
You can select a position of the sub-picture.
In Double (Œ, À) mode, Position cannot be
selected.
Channel
You can select the channel for the sub-screen.
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
PIP Settings
Main picture Sub picture
Component
HDMI1/DVI, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4
PC
TV
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 34 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:52
English Using the Menus
Network Connection
You can set up the Internet Protocol so that you can communicate with various connected networks.
Network Connection - Cable
LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) are described below. Since an IP address,
subnet mask, gateway, and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected, you do not have to enter them manually.
1
Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable.
2
Connect the Modem port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable.
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
You can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status.
The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed, turn the external modem off, turn it on again after at least 10 seconds and
then try again.
For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual of the corresponding
product.
You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router)
You cannot use a manual-connection-type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP. You have to use an
automaticconnection-type ADSL modem.
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem TV Rear Panel
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV)
2 Modem Cable 1 LAN Cable
TV Rear Panel
The Modem Port on the Wall
External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) IP Sharer
The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel
LAN Cable
LAN Cable Modem Cable LAN Cable
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 35 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:53
English Using the Menus
LAN Connection for Static IP Environment
The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below. You have to manually enter the IP address, subnet
mask, gateway, and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider (ISP).
Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable.
You can connect the LAN via a Sharer (Router).
The terminals (the position of the port and the type) of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer.
If you are using a static IP address, your ISP will inform you of the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS. You must enter
these values to complete the network settings. If you do not know the values, ask your network administrator.
For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer (Router), refer to the owner’s manual for the corresponding product.
You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
If you use an IP Sharer (IP Router) that supports DHCP, you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP.
For the procedures to use a static IP address, ask your Internet Service Provider.
Network Connection - Wireless
You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer.
Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ into the USB1(HDD) or USB2 terminal of the TV.
You must use the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’(WIS09ABGN) to use a wireless network.
Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately. The WIS09ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers,
Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com.
To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer. If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can
use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.
Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802.11A, IEEE 802.11B, IEEE 802.11G, IEEE 802.11N. When you play DLNA
video over IEEE 802.11B/G connection, the video may not be played smoothly.
If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on/off, turn it on.
Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently
being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communications may fail.
If you apply a security system other than the systems listed blow, it will not work with the TV.
When applying the security key for the AP (wireless IP sharer), only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : OPEN, SHARED, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
When applying the security key for the Ad-hoc mode, only the following is supported.
1) Authentication Mode : SHARED, WPANONE
2) Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES
If your AP supports WPS(Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN
(Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode.
If the device isn’t certified, it may not connect to the TV via the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
❑
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel
1 LAN Cable
The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel
IP Sharer
LAN Cable LAN Cable
or
TV Rear Panel
The LAN Port on the Wall
Wireless IP sharer
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
LAN Cable
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 36 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:54
English Using the Menus
Broadcast
Security
Network ▶
General
Setup
The menu is activated only if the
‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’
is connected.
■
Setting the Network
Setup
Option Description
Network Type Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the
network.
Cable
Connect to the network using a cable.
Wireless
Connect to the network wirelessly.
■
■
Network Setup Cable Network Setup
(when Network Type is set to Cable)
Please check if the LAN cable is connected.
Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
Network Test: You can test or confirm the network
connection status after setting up the network.
Cable Network Setup-Auto
If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP, the
Internet Protocol (IP) Settings are automatically configured.
1. Set Network Type to Cable.
2. Select Cable Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto.
The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
4. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
❑
■
■
When unable to connect to a wired network
If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to
connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you
connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC
address differs from that of the device (PC).
In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices
other than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If your Internet service provider
requires an ID or password to connect to the Internet (network), your TV may not be
able to connect to the Internet. In this case, you have to enter your ID or password when
connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer (Router).
The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem. In this case, contact your
Internet service provider. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed
the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact Samsung Electronics.
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto ▶
Network Test
U Move E Enter R Return
Cable Network Setup
IP Address :
Subnet Mask :
Gateway :
DNS Server :
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 37 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:54
English Using the Menus
Setup
Option Description
Network Setup Cable Network Setup-Manual
To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address, you
must set up the Internet Protocol (IP).
1. Set Network Type to Cable.
2. Select Cable Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.
4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS
Server.
Press the number buttons on the remote control
when you set the Network manually.
5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
Wireless Network Setup
Internet Protocol Setup → Auto / Manual
Network Test: You can test or confirm the network
connection status after setting up the network.
Select a network: Access Point: You can select
the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network.
If a wireless Access Point is not in the Access Point
list, press the Red button.
When the connection is made, you will be returned
to the screen automatically.
If you have selected an Access Point with a security
authentication: The Security Key input screen
appears. Enter the security key and press the Blue
button on the remote control.
If security encryption type is WEP, 0~9, A~F will be
available when you input security key.
Connecting WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
If Security Key is already set: In access point list, select
WPS.
You can select PBC, PIN, Security Key.
Connecting by using PBC: Select a PBC (Push
Button Configuration). Press the PBC button on
the AP (access point) within 2minutes, and wait for
connection.
Connecting by using PIN: Select a PIN (Personal
Identification Number).
The message showing the PIN Code is displayed.
Input the PIN Code at AP device within 2minutes.
Select OK and wait for connection.
Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work.
When the connection is not established although
tried again, reset the access point. Please refer to a
manual of each access point.
Connecting by using Security Key: When selecting
Security Key, the input window is displayed. Input
the security key and press ENTERE button.
Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work.
If Security Key is not set: When security setting
of AP that supports WPS is NONE, you can select
PBC, PIN, None Security. None Security is capable
of connecting to AP directly without using WPC
function.
Process of PBC, PIN is same as above.
Refer to if Security Key is already set.
Try again if connecting operation doesn’t work.
■
■
●
●
●
●
■
●
●
●
●
●
●
The menu is activated only if the
‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’
is connected.
■
Wireless Network Setup
U Move E Enter R Return
Select a network 3/9
Search
Ad-hoc
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
Security Key
Cancel
Press the PBC button on the access point.
Access Point Name : AP_1
Press OK After input TV’s Pin code in the access
point’s setup.
Access Point Name : AP_1
PIN Code : 12345678
OK Cancel
Wireless Network Setup
n Move `~9 Number E Enter R Return
Security Key
Number
Lowercase
Delete
Done
A
H
O
V
B
I
P
W
C
J
Q
X
D
K
R
Y
E
L
S
Z
F
M
T
G
N
U
Wireless Network Setup
U Move E Enter R Return
Select a network 3/9
Search
Ad-hoc
sson
jee
AP_1
Ap_2
PBC
PIN
None Security
Wireless Network Setup
n Move `~9 Number E Enter R Return
Security Key
Number
Delete
Done
A B C D E F
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 38 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:55
English Using the Menus
Setup
Option Description
Network Setup Ad-hoc: You can connect to a mobile device
without an access point through the ‘Samsung
Wireless LAN Adapter’ by using a peer to peer
network.
How to connect to new Ad-hoc
1. Choose Select a network, then a device list is
displayed.
2. While in the device list, press the Blue button on the
remote or select Ad-hoc.
The message that means the existing network
is disconnected is displayed.
3. Input the generated Network Name(SSID) and
Security Key into the device you want to connect.
How to connect an existing Ad-hoc device
1. Choose Select a network, the device list is
displayed.
2. Select the device you want in the Device list.
3. If security key was applied, input the security key again.
If network doesn’t operate normally, please
check the Network Name(SSID) and
Security Key again. If the Security Key
is incorrect, it may be the reason for the
malfunction.
Wireless Network Setup-Auto
If you want to connect AP, AP should support DHCP.
Only devices which support Ad-hoc mode can be
connected without DHCP.
1. Set Network Type to Wireless.
2. Select Wireless Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto.
The Internet Protocol is set automatically.
4. Select a network through Select a network.
5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
Wireless Network Setup-Manual
1. Set Network Type to Wireless.
2. Select Wireless Network Setup.
3. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.
4. Set up IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS
Server.
Press the number buttons on the remote control
when you set the Network manually.
5. Select Network Test to check the network connectivity.
■
■
■
■
Internet Protocol Setup : Auto ▶
Network Test
Select a network : AP1
U Move E Enter R Return
Wireless Network Setup
IP Address :
Subnet Mask :
Gateway :
DNS Server :
Internet Protocol Setup : Manual ▶
Network Test
Select a network : AP1
U Move E Enter R Return
Wireless Network Setup
IP Address : 0 0 0 0
Subnet Mask : 0 0 0 0
Gateway : 0 0 0 0
DNS Server : 0 0 0 0
The existing network system may have limited
functionality. Do you want to change the network
connection?
Yes No
When unable to connect to an AP(Access Point)
Your TV may fail to locate an AP(Access Point) that is configured as a private SSID type. In
this case, please change the AP settings and try again. If your Internet service provider has
registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and
authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able
to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device (PC).
In this case, ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other
than your PC (such as your TV) to the Internet. If you cannot connect to the Internet even if
you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider, please contact a Samsung
Electronics.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 39 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:560
English Using the Menus
Input Menu
Input
Option Description
Source List Use to select TV or other external input sources such as
DVD / Blu-ray players / Cable Box / Satellite receivers
(Set-Top Box) connected to the TV. Use to select the input
source of your choice.
TV / Ext. / AV / Component / PC / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 /
HDMI3 / HDMI4 / USB1 / USB2
You can choose only those external devices that
are connected to the TV. In the Source List,
connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to
the top. Inputs that are not connected will be sorted
to the bottom.
If USB devices are connected to the USB1(HDD)
and USB2 jacks, they are displayed as USB1 and
USB2 in order.
Using the Colour buttons on the remote with the
Source list.
Red (Refresh): Refreshes the connected external
devices. Press this if your Source is on and
connected, but does not appear in the list.
TOOLS (Tools): Displays the Edit Name and
Information menus.
■
●
●
Edit Name Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your
input source selection easier.
VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB / AV
Receiver / game / Camcorder / PC / DVI / DVI PC / TV
/ IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA
When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080@60Hz
is connected to the HDMI IN 1 port, you should set
the HDMI IN 1(DVI) mode to DVI PC in the Edit
Name of the Input mode.
When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI
IN 1(DVI) port, you should set the HDMI1/DVI
mode to DVI or DVI PC in the Edit Name of
the Input mode. In this case, a separate sound
connection is required.
■
Press the SOURCE button on
the remote control to view an
external signal source. TV mode
can be selected by pressing the
TV button.
■
Source List
Edit Name
Input ■ PC always stays activated.
Refresh T Tools
Source List
TV
Ext. : - - - -
PC : - - - -
AV : - - - -
Component : - - - -
HDMI1/DVI : - - - -
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 40 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:561
English Using the Menus
Support menu
Support
Option Description
Legal Notice View the Legal Notice and General Disclaimer regarding
Third Party Contents and Service.
The General Disclaimer may differ depending on the
country.
■
Product Guide The Product Guide gives you information on the most
important features of this TV.
The descriptions provided by this function are in English
only.
Picture Quality Full HD 1080p
100Hz Motion Plus
Picture Mode
Medi@2.0 Internet@TV
Content Library Flash
USB2.0 Movie
DLNA Wireless
Eco-Friendly Energy Saving Mode
Eco Material
Using the Remote Control Buttons in the Product Guide Menu
Button Operations
Yellow Button
Shows the contents of the Product Guide sequentially.
(Auto Play)
◄/► Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTERE Select the currently selected item.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
EXIT
Stop the current function and return to the Product Guide
main menu.
Support
Option Description
Self Diagnosis Picture Test
If you think you have a picture problem, perform the picture
test. Check the colour pattern on the screen to see if the
problem still exists.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there
is noise in the test pattern, select Yes. Therefore,
contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select
No. There may be a problem with your external
equipment. Please check your connections. If the
problem still persists, refer to the external device’s
user manual.
Sound Test
If you think you have a sound problem, please perform the
sound test. You can check the sound by playing a built-in
melody sound through the TV.
‘Does the problem still exist with this sound test?’ appears
on the screen.
Yes: If during the sound test you can hear sound only
from one speaker or not at all, select Yes. Therefore,
contact Samsung’s call centre for assistance.
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select
No. There may be a problem with your external
equipment. Please check your connections. If the
problem still persists, refer to the external device’s
user manual.
■
■
If you hear no sound from the
TV’s speakers, before performing
the sound test, make sure
Speaker Select is set to TV
speaker in the Sound menu.
■
The melody will be heard during
the test even if Speaker Select
is set to External Speaker or the
sound is muted by pressing the
MUTE button.
■
Legal Notice ▶
Product Guide
Self Diagnosis
Software Upgrade
HD Connection Guide
Contact Samsung
Support
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 41 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:56
English Using the Menus
If the signal strength meter
indicates that the signal is weak,
physically adjust your antenna
to increase the signal strength.
Continue to adjust the antenna
until you find the best position
with the strongest signal.
■
Current Version 2009/01/17_000001
By USB ▶
By Channel
Standby Mode Upgrade : 45 Min
Alternative Software 2009/01/16_000000
U Move E Enter R Return
Software Upgrade
Support
Option Description
Self Diagnosis Signal Information (digital channels only)
Unlike analogue channels, which can vary in reception
quality from ‘snowy’ to clear, digital (HDTV) channels have
either perfect reception quality or you will not receive them
at all. So, unlike analogue channels, you cannot fine tune
a digital channel. You can, however, adjust your antenna to
improve the reception of available digital channels.
■
Software Upgrade Samsung may offer upgrades for the TV’s firmware in the
future. These upgrades can be performed via the TV when
it is connected to the Internet, or by downloading the new
firmware from samsung.com to a USB memory device.
Current Version is the software already installed in
the TV.
Alternative Software (Backup) shows the previous
version that will be replaced.
Software is represented as ‘Year/Month/Day_Version’.
The more recent the date, the newer the software
version. Installing the latest version is recommended.
By USB
Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade
downloaded from samsung.com into the TV. Please be
careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB
drive while upgrades are being applied. The TV will turn
off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware
upgrade. Please check the firmware version after the
upgrades are complete (the new version will have a
higher number than the older version). When software is
upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will
return to their default (factory) settings. We recommend you
write down your settings so that you can easily reset
them after the upgrade.
By Channel
Upgrades the software using the broadcasting signal.
If the function is selected during the software
transmission period, this function searches for
available software and downloads the software.
The time required to download the software is
determined by the signal status.
Standby Mode Upgrade
To continue software upgrade with master power on,
Select On by pressing the ▲ or ▼ button. 45 minutes after
entering standby mode, a manual upgrade is automatically
conducted. Since the power of the unit is turned on
internally, the screen may be on slightly for the LED
product. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1
hour until the software upgrade is completed.
Alternative Software (Backup)
If there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting
operation, you can change the software to the previous
version.
If software was changed, existing software is
displayed.
You can change current software to alternative
software by Alternative Software.
■
■
■
■
HD Connection Guide This menu presents the connection method that provides
the optimal quality for the HD TV. Refer to this information
when connecting external devices to the TV.
Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly
or when you want to upgrade the software. You can view
the information regarding the call centre, product and
software file download method.
TV Rear Panel
or
USB Drive
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 42 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:56
English Media Play - USB Device
Connecting a USB Device
1
Press the POWER button to turn the TV on.
2
Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the
USB1(HDD) or USB2 jack on the side of the TV.
3 When the Application selection screen is displayed, press the ENTERE
button to select Media Play (USB & DLNA).
Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu
Button Operations
▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTERE
Select the currently selected item. While playing a slide show,
movie, or music file:
- Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play.
- Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play.
∂/∑ Play or pause the Slide Show, music or movie.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
∫ Stop the current slide show, Music or Movie file.
π/μ Jump to previous group/Jump to next group.
INFO Show file information.
MEDIA.P Exit Media Play mode.
< P >, EXIT, TV Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode.
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.
Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device.
Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported.).
Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection, there may be a USB compatibility
problem.
Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not
responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated port, USB1 (HDD) port. However, if the connected device requires high power, the USB1 (HDD)
may fail to support the device.
Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
MSC supports MP3 and JPEG files, while a PTP device supports JPEG files only.
The sequential JPEG format is supported.
The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
For unsupported or corrupted files, the ‘Not Supported File Format’ message is displayed.
If sort key is set to Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder. The other sort key can display up to 10000 files.
MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a
technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive
way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal copying of contents, as well
as managing billings and settlements.
When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. At this point, the loading icon will appear at the screen.
If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time.
If more than one MSC device is connected, some of them may not be recognized.
If a device requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V), the USB device may not be supported.
If an over-power (Fail add new device USB1/USB2 Power Overload) warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a
USB device, the device may not be recognized or may malfunction.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Media Play - USB Device
TV Rear Panel
or
USB Drive
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
Photo
SUM
SUM Device
PHOTO
e Exit
Music Movie Setup
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 43 2009-03-27 �� 6:42:5644
English Media Play - USB Device
Media Play Function
This function enables you to view and listen to photo, music and/or movie files saved on a
USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device.
It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files.
Entering the Media Play (USB & DLNA) Menu
1
Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then
press the ENTERE button.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Media Play (USB & DLNA), then press the
ENTERE button.
The Media Play (USB & DLNA) menu is displayed.
3
Press the Red button, then press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the USB Memory.
Press the ENTERE button.
This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device / DLNA device.
The selected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen.
4
Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then
press the ENTERE button.
To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
Removing a USB Memory Device Safely
You can remove the device safely from the TV.
1
Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen, or while a Slide Show,
music or movie is being played.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Remove Safely, then press the ENTERE
button.
3
Remove the USB device from the TV.
Screen Display
Move to either ‘Sort key List Section’, ‘Group List Section’ or ‘File List Section’ using the Up
and Down buttons. After selecting a section, press the ◄ or ► buttons to select an item.
■
■
■
■
■
Press the MEDIA.P button on the
remote control to display the Media
Play menu.
Press the SOURCE button on the
remote control to view the source
list. Then Press the ▲ or ▼ button
to select USB.
■
■
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
Photo
SUM
SUM Device
PHOTO
R Return
Music Movie Setup
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Preference Basic View Timeline Colour Folder
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
5/15
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select T Tools R Return
Preference Basic View Timeline Colour Folder
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
5/15
1File(s) Selected
1
2
3
4 5
6
Sort key List Section
Group List Section
File List Section
BN68-01985L_Eng.indd 44 2009-03-30 �� 1:05:44
English Media Play - USB Device
Sorting the Photo List
You can sort photos in the Photo List by a particular standard.
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
4
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Timeline,
Colour, Folder, Preference)
The photos are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard.
5
Press the ▼ button to move to the File List Section. Press the ∂ (Play)/
ENTERE button to start the Slide Show in the order you selected.
To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF)
button.
Photo information is automatically set. The colour information extracted from
a photo file may be different from your expectations. You can change the
colour and preference.
PTP does not support folder sort mode.
Option Description
Basic View Shows the folders on the USB memory device.
If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button, only
the photo files contained in the selected folder are displayed.
When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot
set Favourites files.
■
Timeline It sorts and shows photos by date.
It sorts by year and month from the earliest photo.
Colour Sorts photos by colour. You can change the photo colour
information
You should set the Use Colour View to on in the Setup
menu before sorting photos by colour.
■
Folder It Sorts photos by folder. If there are many folders in USB,
the photos files are shown in order in each folder.
The photo file in the Root folder is shown first and the others
are shown in alphabetical order by name.
Preference It Sorts photos by preference (Favourites).
You can change the photo preferences.
Changing the Favourites Settings.
Select the desired photo in the Photo list, then press the
Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
Up to 3 stars can be selected.
The stars are for grouping purposes only.
For example, the 3 star setting does not have any priority
over the one star setting.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
1 Current Sort key: This field shows the current standard for sorting files.
Press the ◄ or ► button to change the standard for sorting files.
2 View Groups: Shows the detailed groups of the files sorted according the
selected Sort key. The sort group where the currently selected file is contained is
highlighted.
3 Currently selected file: The selected file is the file you can now control.
Photo and movie files are displayed as thumbnail images.
4 Current Device: Shows the currently selected device name.
Press the Red button to select a device.
Red (Device) button: Selects a connected device.
5 Help Items
Green (Favourites Settings) button: Changes the Favourites Settings
for the selected file. Press this button repeatedly until the desired value
appears.
Yellow (Select) button: Selects file from the file list.
Selected files are marked with a symbol c.
Press the Yellow button again to cancel a file selection.
TOOLS (Tools) button: Displays the option menus.
(The option menu changes according to the current status.)
6 Item Selection Information: Shows the number of files that are selected by
pressing the Yellow button.
■
■
■
■
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select T Tools R Return
Preference Basic View Timeline Colour Folder
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
5/15
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 45 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:01
English Media Play - USB Device
Photo List Option Menu
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Photo, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo file.
Selecting Multiple Photos
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo file.
Then press the Yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple photo files.
The mark c appears to the selected photo file.
4
Press the TOOLS button.
The option menu changes according to the current status.
Option Description
Slide Show Using this menu, you can play a Slideshow using the
photo files on the USB memory device.
Play Current Group Using this menu, you can play a Slideshow using only the
photo files in the currently selected sorting group.
Change Group Info
(When the Sort key is the
Colour)
You can change a selected photo file’s (or group of files)
colour information in order to move it from one colour
group to another.
This does not change the actual colour of the photo.
The group information of the current file is updated and
the photos are moved to the new colour group.
To change the information of multiple files, select the
files you want by pressing the Yellow button.
■
■
■
Deselect All
(When at least one file is
selected)
You can deselect all files.
The c mark indicating the corresponding file is
selected is hidden.
■
Information The photo file information including the name, the
size, the resolution, the date modified and the path is
displayed.
You can view the information of photo files during a
Slideshow using the same procedures.
■
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
■
■
Press the INFO button to viewing
the information.
■
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder Preference
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Change Group Info
Information
▼
5/15
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 46 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:0247
English Media Play - USB Device
Viewing a Photo or Slide Show
Viewing a Slide Show
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Press the TOOLS button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE
button.
All files in the File List Section will be used for the Slide Show.
During the slide show, files are displayed in order from the currently shown
file.
The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section.
Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the
Background Music is set to On.
While a photo list is displayed, press the∂(Play)/ENTEREbutton on
the remote control to start slide show.
Slideshow Control Buttons
Button Operations
ENTERE Play/Pause the Slide Show.
∂ Play the Slide Show.
∑ Pause the Slide Show.
∫ Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list.
π/μ Change the Slideshow playing speed.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo menus.
Playing Current Group
1
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3
Press the ▼ button to move to the Group List Section.
4
Select a group using the ◄ and ► buttons.
5
Press the∂(Play) button. A slideshow begins with the files of the selected
group.
Alternatively
1
Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the photos contained in
the desired group.
To move to the previous/next group, press theπ(REW) orμ(FF) button.
2
Press the TOOLS button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current group, then press the
ENTEREbutton.
Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used
for the Slide Show.
To perform a Slide Show with only the selected Files
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired photo in the File List Sectiont.
3
Press the Yellow button.
4
Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos.
The cmark appears to the left of the selected photo.
If you select one file, the Slide Show will not be performed.
To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect
All.
5
Press the∂(Play)/ENTEREbutton.
The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
Slide Show
Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
5/15
Preference
SUM E Pause ◀▶ Previous / Next T Tools R Return
▶ Normal 1234.jpg 580x765 2009/12/02 5/15
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Basic View Timeline Colour Folder
1234.jpg
1235.jpg
1236.jpg
1237.jpg
1233.jpg
1232.jpg
1231.jpg
5/15
Preference
BN68-01985L_Eng.indd 47 2009-03-30 �� 1:06:08
English Media Play - USB Device
Alternatively
1
In the File List Section, press the Yellow buttons to select the desired photos.
2
Press the TOOLS button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Slide Show, then press the ENTERE
button.
The selected files will be used for the Slide Show.
Slide Show Option Menu
1
During a slide show (or when viewing a photo), press the TOOLS button to set
the option.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option, then press the ENTERE
button.
Option Description
Stop Slide Show /
Start Slide Show
You can start or stop a Slideshow.
Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed.
This function is available only during a slide show.
You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by
pressing the π (REW) or μ (FF) button during the
Slide Show.
■
■
Slide Show Effect You can select the screen transition effect used in the
slideshow.
None / Fade1 / Fade2 / Blind / Spiral / Checker /
Linear / Stairs / Wipe / Random
This function is available only during a slide show.
■
Rotate You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device.
Whenever you press the ◄ button, it rotates by 270˚,
180˚, 90˚, and 0˚.
Whenever you press the ► button, it rotates by 90˚,
180˚, 270˚, and 0˚.
The rotated file is not saved.
■
■
■
Zoom You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device.
(x1 → x2 → x4)
To move the enlarged photo image, press the
ENTERE button, then press the ▲/▼/◄/► buttons.
Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than
the original screen size, the location change function
doesn’t work.
The enlarged file is not saved.
■
■
Background Music You can select background music when watching a Slide
Show.
Background Music
Off: Background music is not played.
On: When the background music is available, if
you select On, the music is played back.
BGM Mode
You can select a mode to use for the background music.
BGM Mood
Music with the mood you selected is set as the
background music.
If you set BGM Mode to Mood, you can select a mood.
Select Music File (0 File(s) Selected)
Only the selected music file is set as the background
music.
If you set BGM Mode to Selected File, you can select a
music file.
■
■
■
■
Picture Setting /
Sound Setting
You can select the picture and sound settings.
Information The photo file information is displayed.
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
■
To use this feature, there must be
music and photo files stored on
the USB device.
Loading music files is needed to
change BGM mode. Play music
files in music category to load.
■
■
Stop Slide Show
Slide Show Speed : Normal
Slide Show Effect : Fade1
Rotate
Zoom
Background Music
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
▼
U Move E Enter e Exit
Tools
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 48 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:07
English Media Play - USB Device
Sorting the Music List
You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard.
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
4
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Title, Artist,
Mood, Genre, Folder, Preference)
The Music files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard.
5
Press the ▼ button to move to the File List Section. Press the ENTERE button
to start playing music in the order selected by the user.
To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF)
button.
Music information is automatically set. The mood information extracted from
a music file may differ from the expectations of the user. You can change the
mood and preference.
Option Description
Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device.
If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button,
only the music files contained in the selected folder are
displayed.
When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot
set Favourites files.
■
Title Sorts the music titles in symbol/number/alphabet/special
order, and shows the music file.
Artist Sorts the music file by artist in symbol/number/alphabet/
special order.
Mood Sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music
mood information.
Genre Sorts music files by the genre.
Folder Sorts music files by the folder. If there are many folders in
USB, the files are shown in order in each folder.
The music file in the Root folder is shown first and the
others are shown in alphabetical order by name.
Preference Sorts music files by preference (Favourites).
You can change the music files preferences.
Changing the Favourites Setting
Select the desired music file in the Music list, then
press the Green button repeatedly until the desired
setting appears.
Up to 3 stars can be selected.
The stars are for grouping purposes only.
For example, the 3 star setting does not have any
priority over the one star setting.
■
■
■
Music List Option Menu
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Music, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired Music file.
Selecting Multiple Music Files
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file. Then press the
Yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
The mark c appears to the selected music file.
4
Press the TOOLS button.
The option menu changes according to the current status.
■
■
■
■
■
If there is no title information
for a music file, the filename is
displayed.
If no information is available for the
Artist, Album, Year, or Genre the
corresponding item is displayed
as blank.
■
■
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select T Tools R Return
Preference Basic View Title Genre Folder
I Love You
HaHaHa
Gold
Shine
Way
Want Me
Lies
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Energetic 3/37
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Preference Basic View Title Genre Folder
HaHaHa
Gold
Shine
Way
Want Me
Lies
I Love You
Glen Hans
Once Ost
2007
Soundtrack
Energetic 3/37 Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 49 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:080
English Media Play - USB Device
Option Description
Play Current Group Using this menu, you can only play music files in the
currently selected sorting group.
Change Group Info
(When the Sort key is
Mood)
You can change the mood information of music files.
The group information of the current file is updated and
the file is moved to the new group.
To change the information of multiple files, select files
by pressing the Yellow button.
■
Deselect All
(When at least one file is
selected)
You can deselect all files.
The c mark indicating the corresponding file is
selected is hidden.
■
Information The music file information including the name, the size,
the date modified and the path is displayed.
You can view the music file information during a Play
Current Group using the same procedures.
■
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Playing a Music
Playing a Music File
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a music file to be played.
3
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension. Files with other
file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the same USB
device.
The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
To adjust the music volume, press the volume button on the remote control.
To mute the sound, press the MUTE button on the remote control.
If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer and SRS
TruSurround HD in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may
cause a sound problem.)
The playing duration of a music file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its
playing time information is not found at the start of the file.
π (REW) or μ (FF) buttons do not function during play.
Music Play Control Buttons
Button Operations
ENTERE Play/Pause the music file.
∂ Play the music file
∑ Pause the music file
∫ Exit play mode and return to the music list.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Music menus.
Music Function Information Icon
p When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are
repeated. Repeat Mode is On.
q When all music files in the folder (or the selected file) are played
once. Repeat Mode is Off.
■
■
■
■
■
■
Press the INFO button to viewing
the information.
■
SUM E Pause ◀▶ Previous / Next T Tools R Return
Way I Love You HaHaHa
▶ 00:00:04 / 00:04:04 3/37
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 50 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:081
English Media Play - USB Device
Playing the Music Group
1
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3
Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section.
4
Press the ∂ (Play) button. The files of the selected group will start playing.
Alternatively
1
Select a sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in
the desired group.
To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF)
button.
2
Press the TOOLS button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the
ENTERE button.
The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
Playing the selected Music Files
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file.
3
Press the Yellow button.
4
Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files.
The c appears to the left of the selected music file.
To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect
All.
5
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
The selected files will be played.
Music Play Option Menu
Option Description
Repeat Mode You can play music files repeatedly.
Picture Setting /
Sound Setting
You can configure the picture and sound settings.
Information The music file information is displayed.
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
■
■
■
■
■
Repeat Mode ◀ On ▶
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move L Adjust e Exit
Tools
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 51 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:09
English Media Play - USB Device
Sorting the Movie List
You can sort movies in the Movie List by a particular standard.
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
4
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard. (Basic View, Timeline,
Title, Folder, Preference)
The movie files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard.
5
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button to play the movie in the order selected.
Movie information is automatically set. You can change the preference.
Option Description
Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device.
If you select a folder and press the ENTERE button,
only the movie files contained in the selected folder are
displayed.
When sorted according to the Basic View, you cannot
set Favourites files.
■
Timeline Sorts movies by date. It sorts by year and month from the
earliest movie.
Title Sorts and displays the movie titles in symbol/number/
alphabet/special order.
Folder If there are many folders in USB, the movies files are
shown in order in each folder. The movie file in the
Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in
alphabetical order by name.
Preference Sorts movies by preference. (Favourites)
You can change the movie preferences.
Changing the Favourites Setting
Select the desired movie file in the movie list, then
press the Green button repeatedly until the desired
setting appears.
Up to 3 stars can be selected.
The stars are for grouping purposes only.
For example, the 3 star setting does not have any
priority over the one star setting.
■
■
■
Movie List Option Menu
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Movie, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired Movie file.
Selecting Multiple Movie Files
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired movie file.
Then press the Yellow button.
Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
The mark c appears to the selected movie file.
4
Press the TOOLS button.
The option menu changes according to the current status.
■
■
■
■
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select T Tools R Return
Preference Basic View Timeline Title Folder
ABCD.avi
1235.avi
1236.avi
1237.avi
1233.avi
1232.avi
1231.avi
5/15
SUM Device Favourites Settings Select TTools R Return
Preference Basic View Timeline Title Folder
ABCD.avi
1235.avi
1236.avi
1237.avi
1233.avi
1232.avi
1231.avi
5/15 Play Current Group
Information
Remove Safely
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 52 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:10
English Media Play - USB Device
Option Description
Play Current Group Using this menu, you can only play movie files in the
currently selected sorting group.
Deselect All
(When at least one file is
selected)
You can deselect all files.
The c mark indicating the corresponding file is
selected is hidden.
■
Information The movie file information including the name, the size,
the date modified and the path is displayed.
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Playing a Movie File
Playing a movie file
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Pressing the ◄ or ► button to select a movie file to be played.
3
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
The selected file is played.
The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time.
The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as ‘00:00:00’ if its
playing time information is not found at the start of the file.
You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files, but the gaming function is
not supported.
Movie doesn’t support subtitles. (for example, not support smi, srt and sub
files, etc and not support subtitles included in movie files)
Supported Subtitle Formats
Name File extension Format
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt string-based
SubViewer .sub string-based
Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based
Supported Video Formats
File Extension Container Video Decoder Audio codec
*.avi AVI
Divx 3.11
MP3, AC3, LPCM, ADPCM
(MULAW ALAW)
Divx 4.x
Divx 5.1
Divx 6.0
XviD
H.264 BP
H.264 MP
H.264 HP
MPEG-4 SP
MPEG-4 ASP
Motion JPEG
*.mkv MKV
Divx 3.11
MP3, AC3, LPCM, ADPCM
(MULAW ALAW), AAC
Divx 4.x
Divx 5.1
Divx 6.0
XviD
H.264 BP
H.264 MP
H.264 HP
MPEG-4 SP
MPEG-4 ASP
Motion JPEG
■
■
■
■
■
SUM E Pause ◀ ▶ Jump T Tools R Return
ABC.avi
▶ 00:00:01 / 00:05:30 3/37
Press the INFO button to viewing
the information.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 53 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:11
English Media Play - USB Device
File Extension Container Video Decoder Audio codec
*.asf
ASF
Divx 3.11
WMA, MP3, AC3, LPCM,
ADPCM, (MULAW ALAW),
AAC
Divx 4.x
Divx 5.1
Divx 6.0
XviD
H.264 BP
H.264 MP
H.264 HP
MPEG-4 SP
MPEG-4 ASP
*.wmv (VC1) Window Media Video v9
*.mp4
MP4
(SMP4)
H.264 BP
ADPCM, (HE)-AAC, mp3
H.264 MP
H.264 HP
MPEG-4 SP
MPEG-4 ASP
XVID
*.3gp 3GPP
H.264 BP
ADPCM, (HE)-AAC
H.264 MP
H.264 HP
MPEG-4 SP
MPEG-4 ASP
*.vro (ps)
VRO /
VOB
MPEG2
AC3, MPEG, LPCM
MPEG1
*.mpg
*.mpeg (ps)
MPEG1 (Programme Stream)
AC3, MPEG, LPCM
MPEG2 (Programme Stream)
others (ts)
MPEG2 (Transport Stream)
H.264 (Transport Stream) AAC, HE-AAC, MP3, DD+
VC1 (Transport Stream)
Video Play Control Buttons
Button Operations
ENTERE Play/Pause the movie file
∂ Play the movie file
∑ Pause the movie file
TOOLS Run various functions from the Movie menus.
∫ Exit play mode and return to the movie list.
◄ / ► Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file.
▲ / ▼ Move to the first/last of the file.
μ Play the file at double speed. This function may not be supported
depending on the codec.
Playing the movie group
1
Press the ▲ button to move to the Sort key Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select a sorting standard.
3
Press the ▼ or ENTERE button to move to the Group List Section.
4
Press the ∂ (Play) button. Only the files of the selected group will start playing.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 54 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:11
English Media Play - USB Device
Alternatively
1
Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section, select the files contained in
the desired group.
To move to the previous/next group, press the π (REW) or μ (FF)
button.
2
Press the TOOLS button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Play Current Group, then press the
ENTERE button.
The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played.
Playing the selected Movie Files
1
Press the ▼ button to select the File List Section.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the desired music file.
3
Press the Yellow button.
The c mark appears to the left of the selected movie file.
To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button and select Deselect
All.
4
Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files.
5
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
Only the selected file is played.
Playing Movie continuously (Resume Play)
If you exit the playing movie function, the movie can be played later from the point where it
was stopped.
1
Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the ◄ or ►
button to select it from the File List Section.
2
Press the ∂ (Play)/ENTERE button.
3
Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue button.
The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped.
If Cont. Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu, a pop-up
message will appear when you resume play a movie file.M
Movie Play Option Menu
Option Description
Picture Setting /
Sound Setting
You can configure the picture and sound settings.
Picture Size Fit
Play video at the TV screen size.
Original
Play video at the original size.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Picture Setting
Sound Setting
Picture Size : Fit
Caption Setting
Information
Remove Safely
U Move E Enter e Exit
Tools
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 55 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:11
English Media Play - USB Device
Option Description
Caption Setting You can set the captions for the movie.
Caption
You can turn the captions for the movie on or off.
Caption Language
You can set the caption language.
Caption Size
You can change the font size of the captions.
Caption Sync
You can adjust the caption sync.
Caption Sync Reset
You can reset the adjusted caption sync.
■
■
■
■
■
Information The movie file information is displayed.
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
Using the Setup Menu
Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu.
1
Press the MEDIA.P button.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select Setup, then press the ENTERE button.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select the desired option.
4
Press the ◄ or ► button to select the option, then press the ENTERE button.
To exit Media Play mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
Option Description
Use Colour View You can select sorting photos by colour. If this option is
set to On, the loading time may be increased to collect
colour information from the photos.
Music Repeat Mode Select to repeatedly play music files.
Cont. movie play help Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous
movie playback.
Get the DivX® VOD
registration code
Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you
connect to the DivX web site and register the registration
code with a personal account, you can download VOD
registration file.
If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the
registration is completed.
For more information on DivX® VOD, visit www.DivX.
com.
■
Get the DivX® VOD
deactivation code
When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration
deactivation code is displayed.
If you execute this function when DivX® VOD is
registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is
deactivated.
Screen Saver Run Time Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver
appears.
Information Select to viewing the information of the connected device.
Remove Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV.
■
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
Photo
SUM
SUM Device
SETUP
e Exit
Music Movie Setup
Use Colour View ◀ Off ▶
Music Repeat Mode On
Cont. movie play help On
Get the DivX® VOD registration code
Get the DivX® VOD deactivation code
Screen Saver Run Time 4 hours
Information
Remove Safely
U Move L Adjust R Return
If this is set to ON, the loading time increases for collecting the colour
information.
SUM Device
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 56 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:11
English Media Play-DLNA
Media Play-DLNA
Setting the DLNA Network
DLNA allows you to watch pictures, musics and videos saved on your PC or on your TV through a network connection in Media
Play mode. This removes the need to copy them to a USB storage device and then connect the device to your TV.
To use DLNA, the TV must be connected to the network and the DLNA application must be installed on your PC.
Network Connection Diagram
Network Connection Diagram-Cable
Network Connection Diagram-Wireless
1
For more information on how to configure your network, refer to page 37.
You are recommended to locate both TV and PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the TV and
the PC IP addresses should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP Address:
123.456.789.**)
2
Connect the PC to which the Samsung PC Share Manager programme will be installed and the external modem using a
LAN cable.
You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).
■
■
LAN
External Modem
(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV)
TV
PC
LAN
Wireless IP sharer
LAN Cable
TV
PC
Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter
TV Rear Panel
LAN
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 57 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:12
English Media Play-DLNA
Installing the DLNA Application
To play content on the PC on the TV, you have to first install the application. To use the DLNA function smoothly, use the
programme in the CD-ROM supplied with the TV or use the Samsung PC Share Manager programme corresponding to the TV
model that can be downloaded from the Samsung web site.
System Requirements
1
Insert the Programme CD supplied with this TV into your PC.
2
30MB of free hard disk space is needed for the programme installation.
If you share files, up to 30MB of hard disk drive space is required for each 100 files.
If you cancel file sharing, the hard disk drive space used for the thumbnail information is also freed.
Supported Formats
Image: JPEG/ Audio: MP3/ Video: AVI, MKV, ASF, MP4, 3GPP, PS, TS container.
For detailed supported video formats, refer to page 53.
Install the Application
1
Run the Setup.exe file on the Programme CD supplied with the product.
Alternatively, you can download the file from www.samsung.com.
2
Install the SAMSUNG PC Share Manager as shown in the figures.
3 When the installation is complete, the PC Share Manager icon appears on your Desktop.
Double-click the icon to run the programme.
■
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 58 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:12
English Media Play-DLNA
Using the DLNA Application
The Programme Screen Layout
1
3 4 5
6 7
2
1
Menus: The following application menus
are provided : File, Share, Server, and
Help.
2
Click to share the selected PC server
folder.
3
Click to cancel sharing.
4
Click to refresh the PC folder and files.
5
Click to synchronize the share status.
6
The folders and files of the PC to be
shared are listed.
7
Folders shared by the user are listed.
Option Description
File Property
Shows information on the selected file or folder.
Method 1: Select a file or folder and select the File menu and then select the Property
sub-menu.
Method 2: Select a file or folder, right-click over the selected file or folder and then select
Property from the pop-up menu.
Exit
Exits the DLNA application.
If you select Exit without applying the changes after changing the shared status, a message will appear
asking if you want to apply the changed settings to the PC. Select Yes to apply the changes and exit the
application.
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 59 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:130
English Media Play-DLNA
Option Description
Share Sharing a Folder
You can share a folder from your PC to the TV. The maximum number of folders that can be shared is 32.
Your PC will operate as a server to the TV.
Method 1: Select a folder in My Computer, select the Share menu and then select the Share
Folder sub-menu.
Method 2: Select a folder in My Computer, right-click over the selected folder and then select
Share Folder from the popup menu.
Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the My Computer folder list in the left pane
and drag & drop the folder into the Shared Folders pane. If a message appears asking you to
confirm the shared folder, select Yes.
■
Cancelling a Shared Folder
You can cancel a shared folder on your PC. Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane and select
Unshare Folder.
Method 1: Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane, select the Share menu and then select
Unshare Folder.
Method 2: Select a folder from the Shared Folder pane, right-click over the selected folder and
then select Unshare Folder from the pop-up menu.
Method 3: Locate the mouse pointer over a folder in the Shared Folder pane and drag&drop
the folder into the My Computer pane. If a message appears asking you to confirm the
cancelation, select Yes.
■
Applying the Current Settings
Perform this when synchronization is necessary due to a new shared folder or cancelling a shared folder.
The Set Changed State menu applies changes to shared folders to the data saved with the PC share
programme.
Since applying changes to the internal data is a time-consuming process, this function enables users to
apply changes to the data only when required.
Until the Set Changed State menu is selected, the changed state of the shared folder is not applied to the
server.
Changes to the shared folders are not applied to your PC until you select the Set Changed State menu.
Method 1: Select the Share menu and select the Refresh DB sub-menu.
Method 2: Click the Set Changed State icon.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 60 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:131
English Media Play-DLNA
Option Description
Share Setting the Access Permission
To enable the TV to find your PC, the TV must be set to Set Device Policy in the Access Permission
Settings window. In addition, the PC server and the TV must be on the same subnet.
Method: Select the Share menu and select Set Device Policy. Rejected items are represented
in gray. You can change the access permissions by using the Allow Accept / Deny button.
To delete an item, select the item and select Delete Item.
■
Server Server
You can run or stop using your PC as a server.
Run DLNA Digital Media Server when Windows Starts
You can determine whether to start the PC server automatically when Windows starts.
Change server name
You can rename the PC server. Enter a new name and click OK. The new name will appear at the top right
of the window and will appear on the TV.
■
■
■
Help Version
The programme version information message box appears.
■
Using the DLNA Function
Using the DLNA Menu
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enables content saved on a DLNA server (usually your PC) connected to your TV or over a
network to be played. Media Play enables playing content saved on a USB memory device connected to the TV, while DLNA enables
playing content saved on a DLNA server (your PC) connected to your TV or over the network. The procedures to use the content are
the same as those for Media Play (USB & DLNA).
If you install the PC share manager programme supplied with the TV onto a PC, you can have the PC perform the role of a DLNA
server over the network.
For the detailed procedures on using the DLNA menu, refer to pages 43~56.
1
Press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control to display the DLNA menu.
2
Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Photo, Music, Movie, Setup), then press the ENTERE button.
To exit DLNA mode, press the MEDIA.P button on the remote control.
DLNA does not support the following functions.
The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions.
Sorting files by preference in the Photo, Music, and Movie folders.
The Change Group Info function.
The Copy / Delete function.
The Remove Safely function.
The REW/FF (π/μ) key functions while a movie is playing.
Function to watch continuously when playing movie.
Playing Movie Continuously (Resume Play) function.
The Skip function may not work with some container such as asf and mkv.
The Divx DRM, Multi-audio, embedded caption does not supported.
Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall programme on your PC.
The Skip (◄/► keys) or Pause function may not work while a movie is playing for the DLNA of other manufacturers,
depending on the corresponding content information.
The playing time may not be displayed while a movie is playing.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 61 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:13
English Anynet+
Anynet+
Connecting Anynet+ Devices
What is Anynet+?
Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote.
The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this
feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.
To connect to a TV
Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI
cable.
To connect to Home Theatre
1
Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2, 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using
an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theatre and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an HDMI
cable.
Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on
the Home Theatre.
When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from the
Home Theatre’s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect the
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD player or Cable / Satellite Box (ie Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to
the Amplifier or Home Theatre, not the TV.
Connect only one Home Theatre.
You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the Standby or On status.
Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type.
■
■
■
■
■
■
Anynet+ Device 1
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 3 Anynet+ Device 4
TV
Anynet+ Device 1
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable
HDMI 1.3 Cable HDMI 1.3 Cable
TV
HDMI 1.3 Cable
Optical Cable
Anynet+ Device 2 Anynet+ Device 3 Anynet+ Device 4
Home Theatre
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 62 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:14
English Anynet+
Setting Up Anynet+
Option Description
Setup Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC)
To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must
be set to On.
When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all
the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated.
Auto Turn Off
Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn Off automatically when
the TV is turned Off.
The active source on the TV remote must be set
to TV to use the Anynet+ function.
If you set Auto Turn Off to Yes, connected
external devices are also turned off when the
TV is turned off. If an external device is still
recording, it may or may not turn off.
■
■
Switching between Anynet+
Devices
1
Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMICEC).
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Device List, then press the ENTERE button.
Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed. If you cannot find a device
you want, press the red button to scan for devices.
3
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select to a particular device and press the ENTERE
button. It is switched to the selected device.
Only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Application menu, the
Device List menu appears.
Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot
cancel the operation during the switching operation.
The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of
connected devices.
When the device scan is complete, the number of devices found are not
displayed.
Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned
on via the power button, devices connected to the TV may not always be
automatically displayed in the device list. Press the Red button to search for
the connected device.
If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button,
you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+
device by using the Device List.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
U Move E Enter R Return
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) : On ▶
Setup
Auto Turn Off : Yes
U Move E Enter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
Press the TOOLS button to
display the Tools menu. You
can also display Anynet+ menu
by selecting Tools → Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC).
■
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home Network Centre
Application
U Move E Enter R Return
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) : On
Setup
Auto Turn Off : Yes ▶
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 63 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:14
English Anynet+
Anynet+ Menu
The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices
connected to the TV.
Option Description
View TV Anynet+ mode changes to TV broadcast mode.
Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list.
(device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus.
E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of the
DVD recorder will appear.
(device_name) INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device.
E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the play menu of the
DVD recorder will appear.
Recording: (*recorder) Starts recording immediately using the recorder.
(This is only available for devices that support the
recording function.)
Stop Recording: (*recorder) Stops recording.
Receiver Sound is played through the receiver.
TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet+ Mode
Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons
Anynet+ Device
After switching to the device,
when the menu of the
corresponding device is displayed
on the screen.
Numeric buttons
▲/▼/◄/►
ENTERE buttons
Colour buttons
EXIT button
After switching to the device,
while playing a file
π(Backward search)
μ(Forward search)
∫(Stop) / ∂(Play)
∑(Pause)
Device with built-in
Tuner
After switching to the device,
when you are watching a TV
programme
P > / P < button
Audio Device When Receiver is activated Y / MUTE button
The Anynet+ function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set
to TV.
The ∏ button works only while in the recordable state.
You cannot control Anynet+ devices using the buttons on the TV.
You can control Anynet+ devices only using the TV remote control.
The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions.
If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device.
The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products.
The π, μ operations may differ depending on the device.
■
■
■
■
■
■
If more than one recording
device is connected, they are
displayed as (*recorder) and
if only one recording device is
connected, it will be represented
as (*device_name).
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 64 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:14
English Anynet+
Recording
You can make a recording of a TV programme using a Samsung recorder.
1
Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMICEC).
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Recording Immediately and press the
ENTERE button. Recording begins.
When there is more than one recording device.
When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are
listed. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select a recording device and press the
ENTEREbutton. Recording begins.
When the recording device is not displayed select Device List and press the
Red button to search devices
3
Press the EXIT button to exit.
You can record the source streams by selecting Recording: (device_name).
Pressing the ∏ button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you
are watching video from another device, the video from the device is recorded.
Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the
recording device. To properly connect an antenna to a recording device, refer
to the recording device’s users manual.
Listening through a Receiver
(Home Theatre)
You can listen to sound through a receiver instead of the TV speaker.
1
Press the TOOLS button. Press the ENTERE button to select Anynet+ (HDMICEC).
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Receiver. Press the ◄ or ► button to select
On or Off.
3
Press the EXIT button to exit.
If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.
The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of
the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV.
When the receiver (home theatre) is set to On, you can hear sound output
from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV(air) signal, the
TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the Home theatre receiver. When the
source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via
HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theatre receiver.
If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On (by
disconnecting the power cord or a power failure), the Speaker Select may be
set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
U Move E Enter R Return
View TV
Device List
Recording: DVDR
DVDR MENU
DVDR INFO
Receiver: Off
Setup
U Move E Enter R Return
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 65 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:15
English Anynet+
Troubleshooting for Anynet+
Problem Possible Solution
Anynet+ does not work. Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices
only.
Connect only one receiver (home theatre).
Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected.
Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI 1.3 cable connections.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
Check whether it is Anynet+ exclusive remote control.
Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, Operating Media Play,
Plug & Play, etc.)
When connecting or removing the HDMI 1.3 cable, please make sure to search devices
again or turn your TV off and on again.
Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+
(HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ Setup menu.
Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV. Then press the TOOLS button
to show the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want.
●
●
I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet+
devices.
Press P >/<, PRE-CH, and FAV.CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the channel
button operates only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.)
●
●
●
The message ‘Connecting to
Anynet+ device...’ appears on
the screen.
You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view
mode.
Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete.
●
●
The Anynet+ device does not
play.
● You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play is in progress.
The connected device is not
displayed.
Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions.
Check whether or not the HDMI 1.3 cable is properly connected.
Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
Search Anynet+ devices again.
You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI 1.3 cable only. Some HDMI cables may
not support Anynet+ functions.
If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power
cord or a power failure, please repeat the device scan.
●
●
●
●
●
●
The TV programme cannot be
recorded.
● Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected.
The TV sound is not output
through the receiver.
● Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 66 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:15
English Content Library
Content Library
Using the Content Library
The Content Library allows you to enjoy various content on your TV.
You can use the default content stored in the TV memory or you can enjoy new content using a USB device.
Using the Content Library Menu
1
Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then
press the ENTERE button.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Content Library, then press the ENTERE
button.
The Content Library main menu is displayed.
3
Press the ◄ or ► button to select an icon (Gallery, Cooking, Game, Children,
Wellness, Others, Content Management), then press the ENTERE button.
Using the Remote Control Button in Content Library Menu
Button Operations
▲/▼/◄/► Move the cursor and select an item.
ENTERE Select the currently selected item.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
EXIT
Stop the current function and return to the Content Library main
menu.
< P > /
FAV.CH / CH LIST
Stop Content Library mode and Returns to TV mode.
Colour button Keys that provide functions are described on the corresponding page.
- VOL + / MUTE You can control the volume of the played content.
CONTENTS LIBRARY CONTAINS TEXT, GRAPHICS, IMAGES, MULTIMEDIA, AND
OTHER MATERIALS FOR INFORMATIONAL AND PROMOTIONAL PURPOSES ONLY.
MATERIALS IN CONTENTS LIBRARY HAS BEEN MODIFIED AND KEEPS BEING
REVISED AND UPDATED. THE MATERIALS IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY MAY NOT BE
SUITABLE FOR ALL AUDIENCES.
INFORMATION IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS PROVIDED ‘AS IS.’ ALTHOUGH THE
INFORMATION PROVIDED TO YOU IN THE CONTENTS LIBRARY IS OBTAINED OR
COMPLIED FROM SOURCES WE BELIEVE TO BE RELIABLE, SAMSUNG CANNOT
AND DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS OR
COMPLETENESS
OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE TO YOU FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL
SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY
FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF, OR
IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR THE USE OF, THE
CONTENTS LIBRARY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
■
Media Play (USB & DLNA)
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Content Library
Internet@TV
Home Network Centre
Application
R Return e Exit
Gallery
Gallery Cooking Game Children Wellness
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 67 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:15
English Content Library
Using the Contents
You can use enjoy content stored in the TV memory.
To return to Content Library main menu, press the EXIT button.
Option Description
Gallery This function plays a Slideshow with high resolution
images and background music and produces various
atmospheres. Using the Gallery function of the TV, you
can change your home atmosphere.
The copyrights of the Gallery contents and all issues
related to them are reserved by TimeSpace, Inc.
Press the ENTERE button to pause the Slideshow,
and also press the ENTERE button to resume the
Slideshow.
Press the INFO button to display information on the
selected photo. (This is not displayed if the photo has
no information.)
■
■
■
Cooking You can view various recipes and then easily follow them
step by step. Enjoy these contents which will give you
great ideas for meals.
The recipes introduced in the Cooking contents on
the Samsung TV are based on recipes published by
Anness Publishing.
The copyrights of the Cooking contents and all issues
related to them are reserved by Practical Pictures.
■
■
Game This category provides entertainment games for the
whole family.
For the buttons used in the games, refer to the
directions on the screen.
Colour Buttons for Games
Red: Press to move to the game home screen.
Green: Press to pause the game.
Yellow: Option Key.
Blue: Press to exit the game
■
■
Children This is educational and interactive content that children
can watch repeatedly.
The copyrights of the Children contents and issues
related to them reserved by UpToTen.
■
Wellness This is beneficial health management content that
provides stretching and massage exercises that can be
enjoyed by the whole family.
The Basic Stretches contents are automatically
played so that you can easily follow the movements on
the screen. To move to the previous or next operation,
press the ◄ or ► button to view the required step. The
selected item is displayed on the screen.
■
■
R Return e Exit
Gallery
Gallery Cooking Game Children Wellness
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 68 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:15
English Content Library
Using the Content Management
You can select multiple content items by selecting content items repeatedly and pressing the Yellow button.
Option Description
Content Management You can select multiple content items by selecting
content items repeatedly and pressing the Yellow
button.
■
My Contents You can check the content saved in the TV memory for
each subitem of the Content Library.
Select a content item and press the ENTERE button.
You can play or delete the selected content item.
■
USB You can check the content saved on the USB device for
each subitem of the Content Library.
Select a content item and press the ENTERE button.
You can play the selected content item.
Content Library only supports USB Mass
Storage Class devices (MSC). MSC is a Mass
Storage Class Bulk-Only Transport device.
Examples of MSC are Thumb drives and Flash
Card Readers.
Playing a game using an external USB memory
device will allow you to save your game
(depending on the game). Take care as removing
the USB memory device while saving data to the
USB memory device may cause the data to be
lost.
Downloading New Contents
New content other than the built-in content will be
provided via the Samsung.com website free of
charge. When you download the paid contents, you
need UDN number to download contents. Check
the UDN number before downloading a new content
item.
Downloading Content
1. Visit the www.samsung.com website.
2. Select a content item in the Contents Download
page.
3. Download the contents onto the USB memory
device.
4. Go to Content Library main menu by pressing
CONTENT button or choosing Content Library
(Menu → Application → Content Library).
5. Plug the USB memory into USB port on the side of
the TV.
6. You can see the content sub item which you
downloaded.
7. Select a content item and press the enter button.
8. You can play the selected content item.
■
■
Setup Screen Saver Run Time: Select to set the waiting
time before the screen saver appears.
Save UDN: Saves the UDN number to a USB device.
■
■
An NTFS format USB storage
device does not support saving
UDN.
We recommend using a FAT
format USB storage device.
■
Content
Management
R Return e Exit
Game Children Wellness Other Content
Management
R Return e Exit
1/1
My Contents
USB
Setup
TV Memory
17.16GB/189.00MB Available
Gallery
Cooking
Game
Children
Wellness
Others
Content Management > My Contents
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 69 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:160
English Internet@TV
1
Press the MENU button. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Application, then
press the ENTERE button.
2
Press the ▲ or ▼ button to select Internet@TV, then press the ENTERE
button.
Internet@TV starts.
3
The General Disclaimer is displayed on the screen. Select I accept or I do not
accept.
For more information on the General Disclaimer, refer to page 41.
4
The ‘welcome screen’ is the starting point of the Internet@TV guided setup.
If you select Exit Setup, this step is resumed when you press the
INTERNET@ button.
Select Let’s get started!
5
Choosing your location allows TV Widgets to use localized content.
Select your country from the list provided.
6
Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget Engine Privacy Policy is required to use
Internet@TV.
Select OK, I Accept.
7
Accepting the Yahoo!® TV Widget System Terms of Service is required to use
Internet@TV.
Select OK, I Accept.
8
Enter your name to setup your profile. Each profile has its own list of widgets.
You can create a profile for each person who uses Internet@TV.
Enter your name and select Save this name.
For more information, refer to page 73.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Internet@TV
If you have some problems while using a widget service, please contact to content provider. In the widget, press the Green button and
get information of contact or refer to help website for widget provider information.
Getting Started with Internet@TV
Internet@TV provides an integrated Internet and television experience powered by the Yahoo!® Widget Engine.
You can monitor financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, and track news and weather all through the Internet@TV service
on your television.
If Network condition is unstable, this function may not work. Then, TV would be turned off automatically. Otherwise turn off the TV
using power button.
You may experience slow operation or hesitation when using this function due to network conditions.
When running Internet@TV for the first time, the basic settings proceed automatically.
The first step is to set up your network. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to page 37.
After your network is operational, the Internet@TV software guides you through a step-by-step setup wizard.
What is a Widget?
A TV Widget is a small web application that allows you to easily access your favourite site using the remote control. You can enjoy
various types of information, such as the latest news, weather information, and stock information, etc. on your TV along with your
friends or family members.
Some widgets may not be supported depending on the regulations of the corresponding country.
Some widgets will only support limited services depending on the regulations of the corresponding country.
The colour buttons may work differently depending on the widget.
The operation may not be smooth depending on the network condition.
The Snippet is a symbol of Widget.
What is a Snippet?
A snippet shows a part of the Widget contents such as weather and stock information that the user wants to view.
The snippets are automatically updated in real time.
It may take a few seconds to load the snippet.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Press the INTERNET@ button
on the remote control to display
the Internet@TV menu.
■
Welcome to Yahoo!® TV Widgets!
Yahoo! TV Widgets bring the best of the internet to
your TV! You can get updated weather conditions or
sports scores, get updated information on stocks, or
even view full-screen photos and video!
We just need to get a few things set up, and you’ll be
on your way!
Let’s get started! Exit setup
1
What’s your name?
Each person in the house who
uses the TV can have their own
personalized set of widgets.
We’ll keep track of these
individual widget profiles by the
name you enter, Enter the name
YOU want to use now.
Save this name
5
Skip this step Exit setup
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 70 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:161
English Internet@TV
9
Internet@TV tests the network connection.
If the test fails, configure your network again.
For more information, refer to page 37
10
The guided setup is complete. A tutorial on how to use Internet@TV is next.
Select Continue to view the tutorial.
Select Exit setup to start using Internet@TV now.
To run the tutorial again, select Profile Widget → System Setting → Repeat Tutorial.
11
Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to display the Internet@TV user interface.display
Screen Display
Dock mode
1 A welcome banner is shown with your profile name in the top right corner.
This banner disappears after a short delay.
2 The banner highlights two remote control shortcuts.
If you press the blue button (Viewport) on your remote control, the
display is toggled between ‘Viewport mode’ and ‘Overlay mode’. In
Viewport mode, the TV or video plays in a scaled-down area with
graphics outside. In overlay mode, the graphics are displayed on top
of the TV or video.
If you press the yellow button (Edit Snippet) on your remote control,
a help window is displayed and the snippet with focus can be edited
3 Press the INTERNET@ button on the remote control to begin.
The horizontal list at the bottom of your TV screen is called ‘the dock’.
The items in the list are called ‘snippets’.
A snippet is a shortcut which launches a TV Widget.
A TV Widget is an Internet application designed to run on your TV.
Move between snippets by pressing the ◄ or ► buttons on the remote
control.
Focus is located in the left most region (highlighted in blue).
The dock slides snippets under that focal point.
Launch a TV Widget by pressing the ENTERE button on the remote
control when its snippet is in focus.
When you add snippets, they form a stack which you can navigate by
pressing the ▲ or ▼ buttons.
Two special TV Widgets appear in the dock: the Profile Widget and the
Gallery Widget. These cannot be deleted.
The dock will slide off screen after a timeout period.
Sidebar mode
1 Focus on a snippet and press the ENTERE button to launch the TV
Widget sidebar. The TV Widget logo and Home are at the top of the
sidebar.
2 Current menu is displayed under the TV Widget logo.
To return to a previous screen, select it and press the ENTERE
button.
You can also press the RETURN button on the remote control.
3 Current selection is always highlighted in blue. The highlighted button has
focus and is activated when you press the ENTERE button.
4 When there is a lot of data, a page control is used.
Current page and total pages are displayed.
Move between pages by pressing ◄ or ► buttons.
5 The bottom toolbar includes colour buttons that correspond to the red, green,
yellow and blue buttons on the remote control.
Red button: Close the widget.
Green button: Change the widget’s setting.
Yellow button: Manage your snippets.
Blue button: Size video to fit, or make it full screen.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
3
WEATHER Widget Gallery FINANCE Signed in as
John
Hello John!
5:15 AM Mon January 19th
Viewport Edit Snippet
1
2
3
My Stocks
To remove a stocks symbol, please
select it from the list below.
Display Format Value
About Yahoo! Finance...
FINANCE
PAGE 1 OF 2
^DJI
^IXIC
YHOO
AAPL
INTC
AMZN
Add New Symbol...
Import Symbols From Yahoo!...
1
2
3
4
5
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 71 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:17
English Internet@TV
Editing Snippets in the Dock
1
Edit a snippet by focusing on it in the dock and pressing the yellow button.
2
The snippet moves to the Second position and its tile slides up to show the following help text:
Delete (Red button): Remove this TV Widget.
Deleted widgets can be re-installed using the Widget Gallery.
Move (Blue button): Re-order the snippet. Press the ◄ or ► button to scroll. Press the yellow button to drop into the
new position.
Done (Yellow button): Exit the Edit Snippet menu.
■
■
■
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark
and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may
not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting
the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish,
upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services
displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD
PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND
ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY,
VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH
THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS,
OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE
OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time,
without notice, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period
of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung
has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any
change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung
may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without notice or liability.
Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for
service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 72 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:17
English Internet@TV
Using the Profile Widget
The Profile Widget configures your user profile.
You can set up multiple profiles, and each profile maintains its own list of widgets.
The Switch Profile menu allows you to switch to a different user profile.
At least two profiles must be registered. If you want to add a profile, refer to page 73.
The Profile Settings menu allows you to customize and protect your profile.
User profiles can be customized with a unique Name and an Avatar (a picture used to
represent your profile).
Your profile’s Name and Avatar are displayed in the profile snippet in the dock.
Profiles can be protected by Create Profile PIN.
When setting the PIN for the first time, you can set a Security Question.
The Profile Settings menu can limit access to widgets.
If you forget your Profile PIN you can answer a Security Question that is associated with
your profile.
A profile that has the Limit Profile indicator turned on will not allow new widgets to be installed.
The Owner PIN must be set to use this function. To set the Owner PIN, refer to page 73.
The System Settings menu allows you to:
Change your Location and set your Zip Code (US only) to tailor the content to your region.
Repeat the Tutorial that was shown during guided setup.
Restore Factory Settings to delete all widget configurations and information.
In the Administrative Controls menu you can:
Set the Screen Saver timeout to avoid screen burn in.
Create Owner PIN and set a Security Question to control other profiles.
Create a new Profile which can be configured with a different set of widgets.
Delete an existing profile.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
System Settings
Location
Repeat Tutorial
Restore Factory Settings
PROFILE
Signed in as
John
Switch Profile
Sign out of Yahoo!
Administrative Controls
System Settings
Profile Settings
PROFILE
Profile Settings
John
Name
Avatar
Create Profile PIN
Security Question
Security Answer
Limit Profile Off
Done
Cancel
PROFILE
Administrative Controls
Screen Saver 240 Minutes
Create Owner PIN
Create Profile
Remove Profile
PROFILE
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 73 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:17
English Internet@TV
From the Profile Widget you can Sign in to Yahoo!® using your Yahoo! ID.
If you have a Yahoo! ID, you can access your personalized content using the Yahoo!®! TV
Widgets.
All Yahoo!®! TV Widgets that are installed are automatically signed-in with your profile’s
Yahoo! ID.
If you have no Yahoo! account, visit www.yahoo.com and create an account.
You may fail to log in with an ID created on the Yahoo website in a country that does not
support Internet@TV.
About Profile widget
Press the Green button.
You can view a brief description of the Profile Widget, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service,
and Privacy Policy.
Using the Yahoo!® Widget
Gallery
Use the Yahoo!® Widget Gallery to add more widgets to your TV.
View available TV Widgets in the following categories:
Latest Widgets: Displays recently updated widgets.
Yahoo!® Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Yahoo!®.
Samsung Widgets: Displays widgets provided by Samsung.
Categories: Displays all widgets by category.
To install a widget, navigate to the detail screen and select Add Widget to My Profile and
press the ENTERE button. The widget is installed and becomes available in the dock.
Widget Gallery Settings
Press the Green button.
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
You can view brief information for the Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy, Terms of Service, and
Privacy Policy.
In the Developer Settings menu You can make your own widget.
For more information on creating your own widget, visit our developer site at http://connectedtv.
yahoo.com/
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Signed in as
John
Switch Profile
Sign out of Yahoo!
Administrative Controls
System Settings
Profile Settings
PROFILE
Sign in to access your Yahoo! data for
the Yahoo! Widgets in this profile. Use
the Profile Widget to sign out.
Yahoo! ID
a b c d e f g h i
j k l m n o p q r
s t u v w x y z 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Next
Cancel
.@# ãéì space
Yahoo! News
by Yahoo!
Samsung Widgets
Widget Gallery
Latest Widgets
Yahoo! Widgets
V 0.9.0
Categories
NEWS
PAGE 1 OF 2
NEWS HEADLINES
Top Stories
Business
Potics
Sports
Technology
More Categories
Settings
About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...
Developer Settings
WIDGET GALLERY
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 74 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:18
English Internet@TV
Using the Yahoo!® Weather
Widget
The Yahoo!® Weather Widget provides updates on your local and favorite weather locations.
This content dynamically changes with weather conditions.
Press the green button on the remote control to display the Yahoo!® Weather Widget Settings
menu.
From the Settings menu you can add or remove a city for which you want to view weather
information.
From the Settings menu:
Add New City by entering the name of the city. Once the search results are displayed, select
the city you want and press the ENTERE button.
Delete City by selecting the city you want to delete from the city list. Press the ENTERE
button and confirm the deletion.
Changing the Temperature Indication Mode
You can change the temperature indication mode to Imperial or Metric. For example,
Imperial will show temperatures in Fahrenheit and Metric in Celsius.
Create a Snippet for a Favorite City
Select the city from the Yahoo!® Weather Widget’s home page and view the detailed weather
information.
Press the Yellow button.
Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the city as a snippet.
Delete a Snippet for a City
Launch the snippet.
Press the Yellow button.
Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet.
Using the Yahoo!® News Widget
The Yahoo!® News Widget provides the latest headline news for business, entertainment,
politics, sports, top stories, and many other categories.
Select a category, select a headline within the category, and view a dynamically updated news
summary.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
51°
San Francisco, CA
Sunnyvale, CA
Paris, France
London, England
New York, NY
Sunnyvale
Cloudy
WEATHER
World
NEWS
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 75 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:18
English Internet@TV
Using the Yahoo!® Flickr
Widget
The Flickr Widget can provide you access to your favorite photos from friends and family
while
watching TV. Share your photos with your family on your big screen TV through a
slideshow.
Personalize the Flickr Widget by logging in with your Yahoo! ID.
For detailed procedures on log in, refer to page 73.
For more information on Flickr, visit http://www.flickr.com.
Your Photos shows photos you have registered with Flickr website.
To view Flickr photos in a slideshow:
Select a thumbnail of a photo and press the ENTERE button to view the photo’s
details.
Select Start Slideshow and press the ENTERE button.
To control the slideshow display:
Press the ENTERE button during a slideshow.
The thumbnails of photos are displayed on the bottom of the screen.
When the slideshow control is displayed, you can Pause, Play and Stop the
slideshow.
If you select the menu and press ENTERE, you can view information for the
selected photo.
The Your Sets menu allows you to view photos you have classified in Flickr.
The Explore menu allows you to explore photos featured by the Flickr website.
You can view the photos updated daily.
The Mark as Favorite or Remove From Favorite menu moves photos to your Favorite
Photos set or removes photos from it.
The Favorite Photos menu allows you to see the photos you have classified as
favorites.
The Your Contacts menu allows you to see updates from family and friends.
The Your Groups menu allows you to select your favorite groups from the
Flickr website to share and enjoy photos with the Flickr community of users.
To configure the Yahoo!® Flickr Widget Settings press the Green button on the remote
control.
The Time Per Slide menu controls the speed of the slideshow.
The Repeat menu will restart the slideshow at the beginning after the last photo is
shown.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Your Photos
Your Sets
Explore
Favorite Photos
Your Contacts
Your Groups
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 76 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:18
English Internet@TV
Using the Yahoo!® Finance
Widget
View stock information and the latest stock news with the Yahoo!® Finance Widget.
Press the green button to set up your stocks.
Use the Add New Symbol menu to enter the name of a new stock.
Select the stock you want to add from the search results and select the Add Symbol menu and
press the ENTERE button.
The selected stock is added to the My Stocks list.
Use the Import Symbols From Yahoo!® menu to retrieve your Yahoo!® Finance portfolio.
The Merge Symbols menu merges the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget with
the symbols from your portfolio.
The Replace Symbols menu deletes the symbols in the Yahoo!® Finance Widget and
replaces them with the symbols from your portfolio.
Use the Display Format menu to change the stock-price fluctuation transition to Value or
Percentage.
Create a snippet for a favorite stock.
Select the stock symbol from the Yahoo!® Finance Widget’s home page and view the
detailed finance information.
Press the Yellow button.
Select the Add Snippet menu and press ENTERE to add the stock as a snippet.
Delete a snippet
Launch the snippet from the dock
Press the yellow button.
Select the Delete Snippet menu and press ENTERE to remove the snippet.
Troubleshooting for Internet@
TV
Problem Possible Solution
Some widget services do not work. Check with that service provider.
In the widget, press the green button and get contact information or refer to help
website for widget service provider information.
Refer to Help website page.
Some widget contents only have
English. How can I change the
language?
Widget content language may be different from widget user interface language.
It depends on service provider.
After factory reset, Yahoo Widget
service doesn’t work and warning
message is displayed.
After factory reset, turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV.
At the Flickr widget, I logged in my
account. But, I can’t view my picture.
Visit Yahoo Web site, and activate your Flickr account at your Yahoo! ID.
At the Profile widget, I did change
location, but the previous setting still
remains.
Turn off and on your TV. Then restart Internet@TV.
Now, you can enjoy widget services supported in changed location.
■
■
■
■
■
My Stocks
To remove a stocks symbol, plase
select it from the list below.
Display Format Value
About Yahoo! Finance...
FINANCE
PAGE 1 OF 2
^DJI
^IXIC
YHOO
AAPL
INTC
AMZN
Add New Symbol...
Import Symbols From Yahoo!...
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 77 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:18
English Internet@TV
Help Website
Country Website
Austria www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Belgium
www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produits → téléviseurs → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Czech www.samsung.com → Produkty → televizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Denmark www.samsung.com → Produkter → stue & soveværelse → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Finland www.samsung.com → Tuotteet → kodinelektroniikka → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
France www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Germany www.samsung.com → Privatkunden → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Greece www.samsung.com → Προϊόντα → τηλεοράσεις → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Hungary www.samsung.com → Termékek → televíziók → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ireland www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Italy www.samsung.com → Prodotti → TV → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Netherlands www.samsung.com → Producten → televisies → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Norway www.samsung.com → Produkter → hverdagsrom & soverom → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Poland www.samsung.com → Produkty → telewizory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Portugal www.samsung.com → Produtos para Consumidores → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Slovakia www.samsung.com → Produkty → televízory → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Spain www.samsung.com → Productos → televisores → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Sweden www.samsung.com → Produkter → vardagsrum & sovrum → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Switzerland
www.samsung.com → Produits → télévisions → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
www.samsung.com → Produkte → Fernseher → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
United Kingdom www.samsung.com → Products → Television → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Turkey www.samsung.com → Tüketici Ürünleri → televizyon → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Estonia www.samsung.com → Klientidele → Televiisorid → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Latvia www.samsung.com → Klientiem → Televizori → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Lithuania www.samsung.com → Namams → Televizoriai → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Russia www.samsung.com → Продукты → Телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Ukraine www.samsung.com → Потребительские продукты → телевизоры → medi@2.0 → Internet@TV
Approaching step may be changed later on.
It can be different links for special countries.
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 78 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:18
English Home Network
Home Network Centre
About the Home Network Centre
The Home Network Centre connects the TV and mobile phones through a network. You can view call arrivals, text message
contents, and schedules set on the mobile phone on the TV using the Home Network Centre. In addition, you can play the media
contents saved on the mobile phones such as videos, photos and music by controlling them onto the TV via the network.
If the device supports DLNA DMC (Digital Media Controller) function, Home Network Centre function is available.
The Samsung SCH-i900 mobile phone supports the Home Network Centre. Other models will be added in the future.
The mobile device may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each user’s guide.
Connecting to the Home Network Centre
For more information about the network settings, refer to page 37.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Ad-hoc Network
1
Connect the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’ to the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port of the TV.
2
For more information on how to configure Ad-hoc network, refer to page 37.
For information on configuring the mobile phone’s network settings, refer to the mobile phone manual.
3
Set up the IP address, SSID and password for the mobile phone in the Ad-hoc Settings of the mobile phone using the Network
Name (SSID) and Security Key (password) displayed on the TV.
Connecting through a Wire / Wireless IP Sharer
Connect the LAN port of the TV and the Wire/Wireless IP sharer using the LAN cable or connect the USB1(HDD) or USB2 port of the
TV and the ‘Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter’
For the procedures to set up the wire/wireless sharer and the mobile phone, refer to the manual of the corresponding device.
■
■
■
■
Mobile phone
TV Rear Panel
Samsung Wireless or
LAN Adapter
or
Mobile phone
Wire/Wireless IP sharer
LAN Cable
or
Mobile phone
Wire/Wireless IP sharer
LAN Cable
Samsung
Wireless LAN
Adapter
TV Rear Panel
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 79 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:190
English Home Network
Setting Up the Home Network Centre
Option Description
Message Shows a list of mobile phones which have been set up
with this TV to use the message function (the call arrivals,
text message contents and schedules set on the mobile
phone).
Allowed
Allows the mobile phone.
Denied
Blocks the mobile phone.
Delete
Deletes the mobile phone from the list.
This function just deletes the name from the list.
If the deleted mobile device turns on or tries to
connect to the TV, it may be shown on the list.
■
■
■
Media Shows a list of mobile phones which is available to
control media contents (videos, photos, music) from the
phone.
Besides mobile phone, other mobile devices that
support DLNA DMC are available
Allowed
Allows the mobile phone.
Denied
Blocks the mobile phone.
Delete
Deletes the mobile phone from the list.
This function just deletes the corresponding
name on the list. If the deleted mobile device
turns on or tries to connect to the TV, it may be
shown on the list.
■
■
■
Setup Message
You can determine whether to use the message function
(the call arrivals, text message contents, and schedules
set on the mobile phone).
Media
You can select whether to use the media function that
plays the contents (videos, photos, music) from the
mobile phone.
TV name
You can set the TV name so as to find it easily on the
mobile device.
If you selects User Input, you can type the TV
name by OSK(On Screen Keyboard). You can
set a name for your TV to be used in the Home
Network.
■
■
■
Message : On
Media : On
TV name : TV
Home Network Centre
Message
Media
Setup
R Return e Exit
111-1234-5671 : Allowed
111-1234-5672 : Allowed
111-1234-5673 : Denied
111-1234-5674 : Denied
Home Network Centre
Message
Media
Setup
R Return e Exit
111-1234-5671 : Allowed
111-1234-5672 : Allowed
111-1234-5673 : Denied
111-1234-5674 : Denied
Home Network Centre
Message
Media
Setup
R Return e Exit
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 80 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:201
English Home Network
Using the Message Function
Using this function, you can view the call arrivals, text message contents and schedules
set on the mobile phone through the alarm window while watching TV.
To disable this Message alarm window, set Message to Off in Setup of the Home Network
Centre.
The alarm window appears for 20 seconds. If no key is pressed or if Cancel is selected, it
appears up to three times at 5 minute intervals.
If OK is selected, or if OK is not selected while the message is displayed three times, the
message will be deleted. The message is not deleted from the mobile phone.
The simple alarm window can be displayed, while using some applications such as Media
Play, Content Library, etc. In this case, to view the contents of the message, switch to TV
viewing mode.
When the message of an unknown mobile phone is displayed, select the mobile phone in the
Message item of the Home Network Centre and select Denied to block the phone.
Message View
If a new text message (SMS) arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window
appears. If you click the OK button, the contents of the message are displayed.
If you select the OK button, the contents of the message are displayed.
If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute
intervals.
You can configure the viewing settings for the text message (SMS) contents on the
mobile phone. For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual.
Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters.
Call Arrival Alarm
If a call arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm window appears.
If you select the OK button, the call arrival alarm is confirmed and the alarm window is closed.
If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute
intervals.
Schedule Alarm
While you are watching TV, the alarm window appears to display the registered
schedule.
If you select the OK button, you can view the contents of the schedule registered on the
mobile phone.
If you select the Cancel button, the alarm window appears up to three times at 5 minute
intervals.
You can configure the viewing settings for the schedule contents on the mobile phone.
For the procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual.
Some special characters may be displayed as blank or broken characters.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
851.86MB/993.02MB Free
Photo
SUM
SUM Device
PHOTO
R Return
Music Movie Setup
husband
husband
SMS
OK Cancel
New message received
Do you want to view
the details?
husband
SMS
OK Cancel
New message received
Do you want to view
the details?
husband
Call
OK Cancel
You have a phone call
Mom
011-298-2030
husband
Scheduled event
OK Cancel
You have a schedule
Do you want to view
the details?
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 81 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:21
English Home Network
Using the Media Function
An alarm window appears informing the user that the media contents (videos, photos, music)
sent from the mobile phone will be displayed on the TV.
The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears.
If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the alarm window appears, the Media
Contents are not played.
To turn off the media contents transmission from the mobile phone, set Media to Off in
Setup of the Home Network Centre.
The contents may not be played on the TV depending on their resolution and format.
Media Play Control Buttons
Button Operations
◄/►
Move the cursor and select an item.
While playing a movie file: Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file.
ENTERE Pressing the ENTERE button during play pauses the play.
Pressing the ENTERE button during pause resumes the play.
RETURN Return to the previous menu.
TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo, Music and Movie menus.
INFO Show file information.
EXIT Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode.
The ENTERE and ◄/► buttons may not work depending on the type of media content.
Using the mobile device, you can control playing media. For details, refer to each user’s guide.
■
■
■
■
Media will be played from “111-123 4-5671”
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 82 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:22
English Other Information
Other Information
Teletext Feature
Most television stations provide written information services via Teletext. The index page of the Teletext service gives you information
on how to use the service. In addition, you can select various options to suit your requirements by using the remote control buttons.
For Teletext information to be displayed correctly, channel reception must be stable. Otherwise, information may be missing or some
pages may not be displayed.
■
3
1
2
4
7
5
6
8
9
0
!
#
@
1 : (exit)
Exit from the Teletext display.
2 6 (index)
Used to display the index (contents) page at any time while you are viewing Teletext.
3 5 (reveal)
Used to display the hidden text (answers to quiz games, for example). To display normal
screen, press it again.
4 4 (size)
Press to display the double-size letters in the upper half of the screen. For lower half of the
screen, press it again. To display normal screen, press it once again.
5 Colour buttons (red/green/yellow/blue)
If the FASTEXT system is used by a broadcasting company, the different topics covered
on a Teletext page are colour-coded and can be selected by pressing the coloured
buttons. Press one of them corresponding to the required. The page is displayed
with other coloured information that can be selected in the same way. To display the
previous or next page, press the corresponding coloured button.
6 / (Teletext on/mix)
Press to activate Teletext mode after selecting the channel providing the Teletext service.
Press it twice to overlap the Teletext with the current broadcasting screen.
7 8 (store)
Used to store the Teletext pages.
8 1 (sub-page)
Used to display the available sub-page.
9 9 (hold)
Used to hold the display on a given page if the selected page is linked with several
secondary pages which follow on automatically. To resume, press it again.
0 7 (cancel)
Used to display the broadcast when searching for a page.
! 2 (page up)
Used to display the next Teletext page.
@ 3 (page down)
Used to display the previous Teletext page.
# 0 (mode)
Press to select the Teletext mode (LIST/ FLOF). If you press it in the LIST mode, it switches
into the List save mode. In the List save mode, you can save Teletext page into list using the
8(store) button.
The Teletext pages are organized according to six categories:
Part Contents
A Selected page number.
B Broadcasting channel identity.
C Current page number or search indications.
D Date and time.
E Text.
F Status information.
FASTEXT information.
Teletext information is often divided between several pages displayed in sequence, which can
be accessed by:
Entering the page number
Selecting a title in a list
Selecting a coloured heading (FASTEXT system)
Teletext level supported by the TV is version 2.5 which is capable of displaying additional
graphics or text.
Depending upon the transmission, blank side panels can occur when displaying Teletext.
In these cases, additional graphics or text is not transmitted.
Older TV’s which do not support version 2.5 are not capable of displaying any additional
graphics or text, regardless of the Teletext transmission.
■
■
■
■
■
You can change Teletext
pages by pressing the
numeric buttons on the
remote control.
■
Press the TV button to exit
from the Teletext display.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 83 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:22
English Other Information
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
The Windows display-settings for a typical computer are shown below. The actual screens on your PC will probably be different, depending
upon your particular version of Windows and your particular video card. However, even if your actual screens look different, the same basic
set-up information will apply in almost all cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.)
1
First, click on ‘Control Panel’ on the Windows start menu.
2 When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Appearance and Themes’ and a display
dialog-box will appear.
3 When the control panel window appears, click on ‘Display’ and a display dialogbox will
appear.
4
Navigate to the ‘Settings’ tab on the display dialog-box.
The correct size setting (resolution) - Optimum: 1920 X 1080 pixels.
If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, the correct value
is ‘60’ or ‘60 Hz’. Otherwise, just click ‘OK’ and exit the dialog box.
Display Modes
If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode, the screen is adjusted automatically. If the signal from the system doesn’t
equal the standard signal mode, adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide; otherwise there may be no video. For the display
modes listed on the next page, the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing.
D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input
Mode Resolution
Horizontal Frequency
(KHz)
Vertical Frequency
(Hz)
Pixel Clock Frequency
(MHz)
Sync Polarity
(H / V)
IBM
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/-
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
MAC
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-
VESA CVT
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 -/+
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 -/+
1280 x 720 44.772 59.855 74.500 -/+
1280 x 720 56.456 74.777 95.750 -/+
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 -/+
VESA DMT
640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
1280 x 1024 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+
1280 x 800 62.795 74.934 106.500 -/+
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+
1440 x 900 70.635 74.984 136.750 -/+
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+
VESA GTF
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 -/-
VESA DMT /
DTV CEA
1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+
When using an HDMI / DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
The interlace mode is not supported.
The set might operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG is not supported.
Too long or low quality VGA cable can cause picture noise at high resolution modes 1920x1080.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 84 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23
English Other Information
Troubleshooting: Before Contacting Service
Personnel
No sound or picture Check that the mains lead has been connected to a wall socket.
Check that you have pressed the button on your set.
Check the picture contrast and brightness settings.
Check the volume.
●
●
●
●
Normal picture but no sound Check the volume.
Check whether the MUTEM button has been pressed on the remote control.
Check the Speaker Select settings.
●
●
●
Screen is black and power
indicator light blinks steadily
On your computer check; Power, Signal Cable.
The TV is using its power management system.
Move the computer’s mouse or press any key on the keyboard.
●
●
●
No picture or black and white
picture
Adjust the colour settings.
Check that the broadcast system selected is correct.
●
●
Sound and picture interference Try to identify the electrical appliance that is affecting the set and move it further away.
Plug your set into a different mains socket.
●
●
Blurred or snowy picture,
distorted sound
Check the direction, location and connections of your aerial.
This interference is often due to the use of an indoor aerial.
●
●
Remote control malfunctions Replace the remote control batteries.
Clean the upper edge of the remote control (transmission window).
Check the battery terminals.
●
●
●
‘Check signal cable.’ message is
displayed
Check that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC or video sources.
Check that the PC or video sources are turned on.
●
●
On PC mode, ‘Not Supported
Mode.’ message is displayed
Check the maximum resolution and the frequency of the video adaptor.
Compare these values with the data in the Display Modes.
●
●
The damaged picture appears in
the corner of the screen
If Screen Fit is selected in some external devices, the damaged picture may appear in
the corner of the screen. This symptom is caused by external devices, not TV.
●
The ‘Resets all settings to
the default values.’ message
appears.
This appears when you press and hold the EXIT button for a while. The product settings
are reset to the factory defaults.
●
You may see small particles if
you look closely at the edge of
the bezel surrounding the TV
screen.
● This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
This TFT LED panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels (6 220 800) which require sophisticated technology to produce.
However, there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product.
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 85 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23
English Other Information
Specifications
Model Name UE40B7000, UE40B7020 UE46B7000, UE46B7020
Screen Size
(Diagonal) 40 inches 46 inches
Power Consumption
Standby <1W <1W
PC Resolution
(Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output) 10W X 2 10W X 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Without Stand
With stand
996 X 30 X 630 mm
996 X 255 X 692 mm
1129 X 30 X 705 mm
1129 X 275 X 767 mm
Weight
With Stand 19 kg 23 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Model Name UE55B7000, UE55B7020
Screen Size
(Diagonal) 55 inches
Power Consumption
Standby <1W
PC Resolution
(Optimum) 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz
Sound
(Output) 15W x 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Without Stand
With stand
1321 X 30 X 815 mm
1321 X 305 X 877 mm
Weight
With Stand 28 kg
Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Storage Temperature
Storage Humidity
10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)
10% to 80%, non-condensing
-20°C to 45°C (-4°F to 113°F)
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel
(Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
■
■
■
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 86 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23Warning! Important Safety Instructions
Please read the appropriate section that corresponds to the marking on your Samsung product before attempting to install the product.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). THERE ARE
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER ALL
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
This symbol indicates that high voltage is present
inside. It is dangerous to make any kind of contact
with any internal part of this product.
This symbol alerts you that important literature
concerning operation and maintenance has been
included with this product.
The slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for necessary ventilation.
To ensure reliable operation of this apparatus, and to protect it from overheating, these slots and openings must never be
blocked or covered.
- Do not cover the slots and openings with a cloth or other materials.
- Do not block the slots and openings by placing this apparatus on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface.
- Do not place this apparatus in a confined space, such as a bookcase, or built-in cabinet, unless proper ventilation is provided.
Give your product 10 cm (4 inch) clearance from the wall.
Do not place this apparatus near or over a radiator or heat resistor, or where it is exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not place heat generating items such as candles, ashtrays, incense, flammable gas or explosive materials near the product.
Do not place a water containing vessel on this apparatus, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Do not expose this apparatus to rain or place it near water(near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet
basement, or near a swimming pool etc.). If this apparatus accidentally gets wet, unplug it and contact an authorized dealer
immediately. Make sure to pull out the power cord from the outlet before cleaning.
This apparatus use batteries. In your community there might be regulations that require you to dispose of these batteries properly
under environmental considerations. Please contact your local authorities for disposal or recycling information.
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords or adaptors beyond their capacity, since this can result in fire or electric shock.
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them,
paying particular attention to cords at plug end, adaptors and the point where they exit from the appliance.
To protect this apparatus from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the
wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system.
This will prevent damage to the set due to lightning and power line surges.
Before connecting the AC power cord to the DC adaptor outlet, make sure the voltage designation of the DC adaptor corresponds to
the local electrical supply.
Never insert anything metallic into the open parts of this apparatus. Doing so many create a danger of electric shock.
To avoid electric shock, never touch the inside of this apparatus. Only a qualified technician should open this apparatus.
Make sure to plug the power cord in until it is firmly inserted. When removing the power cord, make sure to hold the power plug
when pulling the plug from the outlet. Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
If this apparatus does not operate normally - in particular, if there are any unusual sounds or smells coming from it
unplug it immediately and contact an authorized dealer or service centre.
Be sure to pull the power plug out of the outlet if the TV is to remain unused or if you are to leave the house for an extended period
of time (especially when children, elderly or disabled people will be left alone in the house).
Accumulated dust can cause an electric shock, an electric leakage or a fire by causing the power cord to generate sparks and heat
or the insulation to deteriorate.
Be sure to contact an authorized service centre, when installing your set in a location with heavy dust, high or low temperatures,high
humidity, chemical substances and where it operates for 24 hours such as the airport, the train station etc. Failure to do so may
cause serious damage to your set.
Use only a properly grounded plug and receptacle.
An improper ground may cause electric shock or equipment damage. (Class l Equipment only.)
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug shall be
readily operable.
Do not allow children to hang onto the product.
Store the accessories (battery, etc.) in a location safely out of the reach of children.
Do not install the product in an unstable location such as a shaky self, a slanted floor or a location exposed to vibration.
Do not drop or impart any shock to the product. If the product is damaged, disconnect the power cord and contact a service centre.
WARNING - TO PREVENT THE SPREAD OF FIRE,
KEEP CANDLES OR OTHER OPEN FLAMES
AWAY FROM THIS PRODUCT AT ALL TIMES.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 87 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23Wiring the Mains Power Supply Plug (UK Only)
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The mains lead on this equipment is supplied with a moulded plug incorporating a fuse. The value of the fuse is indicated on the pin
face of the plug and, if it requires replacing, a fuse approved to BSI1362 of the same rating must be used.
Never use the plug with the fuse cover omitted if the cover is detachable. If a replacement fuse cover is required, it must be of the same
colour as the pin face of the plug. Replacement covers are available from your dealer.
If the fitted plug is not suitable for the power points in your house or the cable is not long enough to reach a power point, you should
obtain a suitabl y approved extension lead or consult your dealer for assistance. However, if there is no alternative but to cut off the
plug, remove the fuse and then safely dispose of the plug.
Do NOT connect the plug to a mains socket as there is a risk of shock hazard from the bared flexible cord.
IMPORTANT
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
BLUE - NEUTRAL BROWN - LIVE
As these colours may not correspond to the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows :
The wire coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter N or coloured BLUE or BLACK. The wire coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal marked with the letter L or coloured BROWN or RED.
WARNING:
DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH TERMINAL, WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE
LETTER E OR BY THE EARTH SYMBOL , OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN AND YELLOW.
Warranty Card
UNITED KINGDOM
This Samsung product is warranted for a period of twelve (12) months from the original date of purchase, against defective materials
and workmanship. In the event that warranty service is required, you should return the product to the retailer from whom it was
purchased. However, Samsung Authorised Dealers and Authorised Service Centres in other EC Countries will comply with the warranty
on the terms issued to purchasers in the country concerned. In case of difficulty, details of our Authorised Service Centres are available
from:
Samsung Electronics U.K. Ltd.
Customer Care Centre
PO Box 17243
Edinburgh, EH11 4YB
United Kingdom
Tel: 0845 SAMSUNG (7267864) (UK & Northern Ireland)
Tel: 0818 717 100 (EIRE Only)
Fax: +44 0845 650 8080
Web : www.samsung.com
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
1. The warranty is only valid if, when warranty service is required, the warranty card is fully and properly completed and is presented
with the original invoice or sales slip or confirmation, and the serial number on the product has not been defaced.
2. Samsung’s obligations are limited to the repair or, at its discretion, replacement of the product or the defective part.
3. Warranty repairs must be carried out by Authorised Samsung Dealers or Authorised Service Centres. No re-imbursement will be
made for repairs carried out by non Samsung Dealers and, any such repair work and damage to the products caused by such
repair work will not be covered by this warranty.
4. This product is not considered to be defective in materials nor workmanship by reason that it requires adaptation in order to
conform to national or local technical or safety standards in force in any Country other than the one for which the product was
originally designed and manufactured.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 88 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group.
This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project (www.freetype.org).
This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL/LGPL license. Accordingly, the following
GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to vdswmanager@
samsung.com.
GPL software: Linux Kernel, Busybox, Binutils
LGPL software: Glibc, ffmpeg, smpeg, libgphoto, libusb, SDL
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to
make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of
our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you
have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously
to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the
manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The
systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.
Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially
in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the
freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use
of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free
program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program nonfree.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees”
and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than
the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the
earlier work.
●
●
●
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 89 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable
for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation
includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other
activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with
a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently
visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work
(except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a
copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list
meets this criterion.
1. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any
non-source
form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the
case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the
normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable
use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to
the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window
system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an
executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified
in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface
definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked
subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between
those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the
Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the
stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output
from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and
propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You
may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide
you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material
for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on
your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material
outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed;
section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations
under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting
circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent
such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any
intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this
License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence
of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a
fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 90 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under
section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its
parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it
does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of
the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or
legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software
interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2)
access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent
access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require
recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network
server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent
copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding
Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for
as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable
portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not
be included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining
whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product
received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the
status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the
product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required
to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding
Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case
prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under
this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any
third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in
ROM).
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 91 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:23The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has
been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special
password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without
regard to the additional permissions.
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or
from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the
work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give
appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the
copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be
marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions
directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a
further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as
exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These
actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 92 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:2410. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify
and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party
to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in
interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work
from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example,
you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not
initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making,
using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
11. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired
or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent
claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not
to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To
“grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the
party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not
available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange
to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the
covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are
valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance
of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use,
propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended
to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not
convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software,
under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which
the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a)
in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in
connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or
that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that
may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to
whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely
from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting
work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of
the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as
such.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 93 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:2414. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
“AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with
the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state
the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
Copyright (C)
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see .
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
`show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary.
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see .
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read .
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 94 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:24GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL)
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software and other kinds of works.
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program--to
make sure it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the GNU General Public License for most of
our software; it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you
have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: (1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously
to authors of previous versions.
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them, although the
manufacturer can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users’ freedom to change the software. The
systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.
Therefore, we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially
in other domains, we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL, as needed to protect the
freedom of users.
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. States should not allow patents to restrict development and use
of software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free
program could make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program nonfree.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
0. Definitions.
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees”
and “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than
the making of an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the
earlier work.
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program.
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable
for infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation
includes copying, distribution (with or without modification), making available to the public, and in some countries other
activities as well.
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with
a user through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently
visible feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the user that there is no warranty for the work
(except to the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under this License, and how to view a
copy of this License. If the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list
meets this criterion.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 95 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:241. Source Code.
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. “Object code” means any
non-source
form of a work.
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the
case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
language.
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the
normal form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable
use of the work with that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to
the public in source code form. A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major essential component (kernel, window
system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an
executable work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to control those activities. However, it does not
include the work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified
in performing those activities but which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source includes interface
definition files associated with source files for the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked
subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data communication or control flow between
those subprograms and other parts of the work.
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the
Corresponding Source.
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work.
2. Basic Permissions.
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the
stated conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program. The output
from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its content, constitutes a covered work.
This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. You may make, run and
propagate covered works that you do not convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force. You
may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide
you with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material
for which you do not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on
your behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material
outside their relationship with you.
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed;
section 10 makes it unnecessary.
3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations
under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting
circumvention of such measures.
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent
such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any
intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’
legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep intact all notices stating that this
License and any non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all notices of the absence
of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a
fee.
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code
under the terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it, and giving a relevant date.
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under
section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its
parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but it
does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make them do so.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 96 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:24A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works, which are not by their nature extensions of
the covered work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, in or on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or
legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate
does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these ways:
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange.
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied
by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
software in the product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium customarily used for software
interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or (2)
access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
in accord with subsection 6b.
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent
access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge. You need not require
recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the object code is a network
server, the Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equivalent
copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding
Source. Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for
as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code and
Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d. A separable
portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not
be included in conveying the object code work.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for
personal, family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling. In determining
whether a product is a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular product
received by a particular user, “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the
status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the
product. A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial, industrial or nonconsumer uses, unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product.
“Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, procedures, authorization keys, or other information required
to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding
Source. The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case
prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made.
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under
this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any
third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been installed in
ROM).
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has
been modified or installed. Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the
operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network.
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the public in source code form), and must require no special
password or key for unpacking, reading or copying.
7. Additional Terms.
“Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
conditions. Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this License without
regard to the additional permissions.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 97 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:24When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy, or
from any part of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the
work.) You may place additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, for which you have or can give
appropriate copyright permission.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the
copyright holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be
marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material; or
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability that these contractual assumptions
directly impose on those licensors and authors.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further restrictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program
as you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a
further restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or
conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document,
provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms.
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the form of a separately written license, or stated as
exceptions; the above requirements apply either way.
8. Termination.
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to
propagate or modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License (including any patent licenses
granted under the third paragraph of section 11).
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License (for any work)
from that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
you under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new
licenses for the same material under section 10.
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered
work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
acceptance. However, nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work. These
actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work, you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify
and propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing
an organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction, each party
to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in
interest had or could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work
from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example,
you may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License, and you may not
initiate litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making,
using, selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 98 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:2411. Patents.
A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is
based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired
or hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
contributor version, but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
contributor version. For purposes of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
consistent with the requirements of this License.
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential patent
claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version.
In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not
to enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement). To
“grant” such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the
party.
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not
available for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a publicly available network server or
other readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange
to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the
requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the
covered work in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are
valid.
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance
of, a covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use,
propagate, modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is automatically extended
to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it.
A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License. You may not
convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software,
under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and under which
the third party grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a)
in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in
connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, or
that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that
may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to
whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely
from conveying the Program.
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work
licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work, and to convey the resulting
work. The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but the special requirements of
the GNU Affero General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as
such.
14. Revised Versions of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify
a version number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.
Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version.
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 99 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:2415. Disclaimer of Warranty.
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
“AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. Limitation of Liability.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA
OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with
the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state
the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
Copyright (C)
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program. If not, see .
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Copyright (C) This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type
`show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an “about box”.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary.
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see .
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first, please read .
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 100 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:24LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply
to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license
issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product
includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior
written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed
by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in
a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This
product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if
the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include
an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS’’ AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot
simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
BN68-01985L_Eng-1.indd 101 2009-03-27 �� 6:43:24Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories
or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other
household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste
disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material
resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details
of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the
terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes
for disposal.
[English]
Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques)
(Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif)
Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés
(chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des
déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres
déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont
invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et
les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs
et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets
professionnels et commerciaux.
[Français]
Korrekte Entsorgung von Altgeräten (Elektroschrott)
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Sammelsystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf dem Produkt, Zubehörteilen bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation gibt an, dass das Produkt und Zubehörteile
(z. B. Ladegerät, Kopfhörer, USB-Kabel) nach ihrer Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden dürfen.
Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät und Zubehörteile bitte getrennt von anderen Abfällen, um der Umwelt bzw. der menschlichen Gesundheit
nicht durch unkontrollierte Müllbeseitigung zu schaden. Helfen Sie mit, das Altgerät und Zubehörteile fachgerecht zu entsorgen, um die
nachhaltige Wiederverwertung von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern. Private Nutzer wenden sich an den Händler, bei dem das Produkt
gekauft wurde, oder kontaktieren die zuständigen Behörden, um in Erfahrung zu bringen, wo Sie das Altgerät bzw. Zubehörteile für eine
umweltfreundliche Entsorgung abgeben können. Gewerbliche Nutzer wenden sich an ihren Lieferanten und gehen nach den Bedingungen
des Verkaufsvertrags vor. Dieses Produkt und elektronische Zubehörteile dürfen nicht zusammen mit anderem Gewerbemüll entsorgt
werden.
[Deutsch]
Correcte verwijdering van dit product (elektrische & elektronische afvalapparatuur)
Dit merkteken op het product, de accessoires of het informatiemateriaal duidt erop dat het product en zijn elektronische accessoires (bv.
lader, headset, USB-kabel) niet met ander huishoudelijk afval verwijderd mogen worden aan het einde van hun gebruiksduur. Om mogelijke
schade aan het milieu of de menselijke gezondheid door ongecontroleerde afvalverwijdering te voorkomen, moet u deze artikelen van
andere soorten afval scheiden en op een verantwoorde manier recyclen, zodat het duurzame hergebruik van materiaalbronnen wordt
bevorderd. Huishoudelijke gebruikers moeten contact opnemen met de winkel waar ze dit product hebben gekocht of met de gemeente
waar ze wonen om te vernemen waar en hoe ze deze artikelen milieuvriendelijk kunnen laten recyclen. Zakelijke gebruikers moeten
contact opnemen met hun leverancier en de algemene voorwaarden van de koopovereenkomst nalezen. Dit product en zijn elektronische
accessoires mogen niet met ander bedrijfsafval voor verwijdering worden gemengd.
[Nederlands]
Corretto smaltimento del prodotto (rifiuti elettrici ed elettronici)
(Applicabile nell’Unione Europea e in altri paesi europei con sistema di raccolta differenziata)
Il marchio riportato sul prodotto, sugli accessori o sulla documentazione indica che il prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici (quali
caricabatterie, cuffia e cavo USB) non devono essere smaltiti con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. Per evitare eventuali danni
all’ambiente o alla salute causati dall’inopportuno smaltimento dei rifiuti, si invita l’utente a separare il prodotto e i suddetti accessori da altri
tipi di rifiuti e di riciclarli in maniera responsabile per favorire il riutilizzo sostenibile delle risorse materiali. Gli utenti domestici sono invitati a
contattare il rivenditore presso il quale è stato acquistato il prodotto o l’ufficio locale preposto per tutte le informazioni relative alla raccolta
differenziata e al riciclaggio per questo tipo di materiali. Gli utenti aziendali sono invitati a contattare il proprio fornitore e verificare i termini
e le condizioni del contratto di acquisto. Questo prodotto e i relativi accessori elettronici non devono essere smaltiti unitamente ad altri rifiuti
commerciali.
[Italiano]
Eliminación correcta de este producto (Residuos de aparatos eléctricos y electrónicos)
(Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de residuos)
La presencia de este símbolo en el producto, accesorios o material informativo que lo acompañan, indica que al finalizar su vida útil ni el
producto ni sus accesorios electrónicos (como el cargador, cascos, cable USB) deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos.
Para evitar los posibles daños al medio ambiente o a la salud humana que representa la eliminación incontrolada de residuos, separe
estos productos de otros tipos de residuos y recíclelos correctamente. De esta forma se promueve la reutilización sostenible de recursos
materiales. Los usuarios particulares pueden contactar con el establecimiento donde adquirieron el producto o con las autoridades locales
pertinentes para informarse sobre cómo y dónde pueden llevarlo para que sea sometido a un reciclaje ecológico y seguro. Los usuarios
comerciales pueden contactar con su proveedor y consultar las condiciones del contrato de compra. Este producto y sus accesorios
electrónicos no deben eliminarse junto a otros residuos comerciales.
[Español]
Eliminação Correcta Deste Produto (Resíduos de Equipamentos Eléctricos e Electrónicos)
Esta marca apresentada no produto, nos acessórios ou na literatura – indica que o produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos (por exemplo,
o carregador, o auricular, o cabo USB) não deverão ser eliminados juntamente com os resíduos domésticos no final do seu período de
vida útil. Para impedir danos ao ambiente ou à saúde humana causados pela eliminação incontrolada de resíduos, deverá separar estes
equipamentos de outros tipos de resíduos e reciclá-los de forma responsável, para promover uma reutilização sustentável dos recursos
materiais. Os utilizadores domésticos deverão contactar o estabelecimento onde adquiriram este produto ou as entidades oficiais locais
para obterem informações sobre onde e de que forma podem entregar estes equipamentos para permitir efectuar uma reciclagem segura
em termos ambientais. Os utilizadores profissionais deverão contactar o seu fornecedor e consultar os termos e condições do contrato de
compra. Este produto e os seus acessórios electrónicos não deverão ser misturados com outros resíduos comerciais para eliminação.
[Português]
Weee.indd 1 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24Korrekt avfallshantering av produkten (elektriska och elektroniska produkter)
Denna markering på produkten, tillbehören och i manualen anger att produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören (t.ex. laddare, headset,
USB-kabel) inte bör sorteras tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall när de kasseras. Till förebyggande av skada på miljö och hälsa bör
dessa föremål hanteras separat för ändamålsenlig återvinning av beståndsdelarna. Hushållsanvändare bör kontakta den återförsäljare
som sålt produkten eller sin kommun för vidare information om var och hur produkten och tillbehören kan återvinnas på ett miljösäkert sätt.
Företagsanvändare bör kontakta leverantören samt verifiera angivna villkor i köpekontraktet. Produkten och de elektroniska tillbehören bör
inte hanteras tillsammans med annat kommersiellt avfall.
[Svenska]
Korrekt affaldsbortskaffelse af dette produkt (elektrisk & elektronisk udstyr)
Mærket på dette produkt, på tilbehør eller i den medfølgende dokumentation betyder, at produktet og elektronisk tilbehør hertil (f.eks.
oplader, hovedsæt, USB-ledning) ikke må bortskaffes sammen med almindeligt husholdningsaffald efter endt levetid. For at undgå skadelige
miljø- eller sundhedspåvirkninger på grund af ukontrolleret affaldsbortskaffelse skal ovennævnte bortskaffes særskilt fra andet affald og
indleveres behørigt til fremme for bæredygtig materialegenvinding. Forbrugere bedes kontakte forhandleren, hvor de har købt produktet,
eller kommunen for oplysning om, hvor og hvordan de kan indlevere ovennævnte med henblik på miljøforsvarlig genvinding. Virksomheder
bedes kontakte leverandøren og læse betingelserne og vilkårene i købekontrakten. Dette produkt og elektronisk tilbehør hertil bør ikke
bortskaffes sammen med andet erhvervsaffald.
[Dansk]
Korrekt avhending av dette produktet (Avfall fra elektrisk og elektronisk utstyr)
Denne merkingen som vises på produktet, dets tilbehør eller dokumentasjon, indikerer at produktet eller det elektroniske tilbehøret (for
eksempel lader, headset, USB-kabel) ikke skal kastes sammen med annet husholdningsavfall ved slutten av levetiden. For å hindre
potensiell skade på miljøet eller helseskader grunnet ukontrollert avfallsavhending ber vi om at dette avfallet holdes adskilt fra andre
typer avfall og resirkuleres på ansvarlig måte for å fremme bærekraftig gjenbruk av materielle ressurser. Private forbrukere bør kontakte
enten forhandleren de kjøpte produktet av, eller lokale myndigheter, for detaljer om hvor og hvordan disse artiklene kan resirkuleres på
en miljøvennlig måte. Forretningsbrukere bør kontakte sin leverandør og undersøke vilkårene i kjøpskontrakten. Dette produktet og det
elektroniske tilbehøret skal ikke blandes med annet kommersielt avfall som skal kastes.
[Norsk]
Tuotteen turvallinen hävittäminen (elektroniikka ja sähkölaitteet)
Oheinen merkintä tuotteessa, lisävarusteissa tai käyttöohjeessa merkitsee, että tuotetta tai lisävarusteina toimitettavia sähkölaitteita (esim.
laturia, kuulokkeita tai USB kaapelia) ei saa hävittää kotitalousjätteen mukana niiden käyttöiän päätyttyä. Virheellisestä jätteenkäsittelystä
ympäristölle ja terveydelle aiheutuvien haittojen välttämiseksi tuote ja lisävarusteet on eroteltava muusta jätteestä ja kierrätettävä
kestävän kehityksen mukaista uusiokäyttöä varten. Kotikäyttäjät saavat lisätietoja tuotteen ja lisävarusteiden turvallisesta kierrätyksestä
ottamalla yhteyttä tuotteen myyneeseen jälleenmyyjään tai paikalliseen ympäristöviranomaiseen. Yrityskäyttäjien tulee ottaa yhteyttä
tavarantoimittajaan ja selvittää hankintasopimuksen ehdot. Tuotetta tai sen lisävarusteita ei saa hävittää muun kaupallisen jätteen seassa.
[Suomi]
A termék hulladékba helyezésének módszere(WEEE – Elektromos és elektronikus berendezések hulladékai)
Ez a jelzés a terméken, tartozékain vagy dokumentációján arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket és elektronikus tartozékait
(pl. töltőegység, fejhallgató, USB kábel) nem szabad a háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. A szabálytalan hulladékba helyezés által
okozott környezet- és egészségkárosodás megelőzése érdekében ezeket a tárgyakat különítse el a többi hulladéktól, és felelősségteljesen
gondoskodjon az újrahasznosításukról az anyagi erőforrások fenntartható újrafelhasználásának elősegítése érdekében. A háztartási
felhasználók a termék forgalmazójától vagy a helyi önkormányzati szervektől kérjenek tanácsot arra vonatkozóan, hová és hogyan vihetik
el az elhasznált termékeket a környezetvédelmi szempontból biztonságos újrahasznosítás céljából. Az üzleti felhasználók lépjenek
kapcsolatba beszállítójukkal, és vizsgálják meg az adásvételi szerződés feltételeit. Ezt a terméket és tartozékait nem szabad az egyéb
közületi hulladékkal együtt kezelni.
[Magyar]
Prawidłowe usuwanie produktu (zużyty sprzęt elektryczny i elektroniczny)
To oznaczenie umieszczone na produkcie, akcesoriach lub dokumentacji oznacza, że po zakończeniu eksploatacji nie należy tego produktu
ani jego akcesoriów (np. ładowarki, zestawu słuchawkowego, przewodu USB) wyrzucać wraz ze zwykłymi odpadami gospodarstwa
domowego. Aby uniknąć szkodliwego wpływu na środowisko naturalne i zdrowie ludzi wskutek niekontrolowanego usuwania odpadów,
prosimy o oddzielenie tych przedmiotów od odpadów innego typu oraz o odpowiedzialny recykling i praktykowanie ponownego
wykorzystania materiałów. W celu uzyskania informacji na temat miejsca i sposobu bezpiecznego dla środowiska recyklingu tych
przedmiotów, użytkownicy w gospodarstwach domowych powinni skontaktować się z punktem sprzedaży detalicznej, w którym dokonali
zakupu produktu, lub z organem władz lokalnych. Użytkownicy w firmach powinni skontaktować się ze swoim dostawcą i sprawdzić warunki
umowy zakupu. Produktu ani jego akcesoriów nie należy usuwać razem z innymi odpadami komercyjnymi.
[Polski]
Σωστή Απόρριψη αυτού του Προϊόντος (Απόβλητα Ηλεκτρικού & Ηλεκτρονικού Εξοπλισμού)
(Ισχύει για την Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και για άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με χωριστά συστήματα συλλογής) Αυτό το σήμα που εμφανίζεται επάνω
στο προϊόν, στα εξαρτήματά του ή στα εγχειρίδια που το συνοδεύουν, υποδεικνύει ότι το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα (π.χ.
φορτιστής, ακουστικά, καλώδιο USB) δεν θα πρέπει να ρίπτονται μαζί με τα υπόλοιπα οικιακά απορρίμματα μετά το τέλος του κύκλου ζωής
τους. Προκειμένου να αποφευχθούν ενδεχόμενες βλαβερές συνέπειες στο περιβάλλον ή την υγεία εξαιτίας της ανεξέλεγκτης διάθεσης
απορριμμάτων, σας παρακαλούμε να διαχωρίσετε αυτά τα προϊόντα από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και να τα ανακυκλώσετε, ώστε
να βοηθήσετε στην βιώσιμη επαναχρησιμοποίηση των υλικών πόρων. Οι οικιακοί χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επικοινωνία είτε με
το κατάστημα απ’ όπου αγόρασαν αυτό το προϊόν, είτε με τις κατά τόπους υπηρεσίες, προκειμένου να πληροφορηθούν τις λεπτομέρειες
σχετικά με τον τόπο και τον τρόπο με τον οποίο μπορούν να δώσουν αυτά τα προϊόντα για ασφαλή προς το περιβάλλον ανακύκλωση.
Οι επιχειρήσεις-χρήστες θα πρέπει να έλθουν σε επαφή με τον προμηθευτή τους και να ελέγξουν τους όρους και τις προϋποθέσεις του
συμβολαίου αγοράς. Αυτό το προϊόν και τα ηλεκτρονικά του εξαρτήματα δεν θα πρέπει να αναμιγνύονται με άλλα συνηθισμένα απορρίμματα
προς διάθεση.
[Ελληνικά]
Weee.indd 2 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24Правилно третиране на изделието след края на експлоатационния му живот
(Отпадъци, представляващи електрическо и електронно оборудване)(Важи за държавите на Европейския съюз и други европейски
държави със системи за разделно сметосъбиране)
Този знак, поставен върху изделието, негови принадлежности или печатни материали, означава, че продуктът и принадлежностите
(например зарядно устройство, слушалки, USB кабел) не бива да се изхвърлят заедно с другите битови отпадъци, когато изтече
експлоатационният му живот. Отделяйте тези устройства от другите видови отпадъци и ги предавайте за рециклиране. Спазвайки
това правило не излагате на опасност здравето на други хора и предпазвате околната среда от замърсяване, предизвикано от
безконтролно изхвърляне на отпадъци. Освен това, подобно отговорно поведение създава възможност за повторно (екологично
съобразно) използване на материалните ресурси. Домашните потребители трябва да се свържат с търговеца на дребно, от когото
са закупили изделието, или със съответната местна държавна агенция, за да получат подробни инструкции къде и кога могат
да занесат тези устройства за рециклиране, безопасно за околната среда. Корпоративните потребители следва да се свържат с
доставчика си и да проверят условията на договора за покупка. Това изделие и неговите електронни принадлежности не бива да се
сместват с другите отпадъци на търговското предприятие.
[Български]
Správná likvidace výrobku (Elektrický a elektronický odpad)
Toto označení na výrobku, jeho příslušenství nebo dokumentaci znamená, že výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství (například nabíječku,
náhlavní sadu, USB kabel) je po skončení životnosti zakázáno likvidovat jako běžný komunální odpad. Možným negativním dopadům na
životní prostředí nebo lidské zdraví způsobeným nekontrolovanou likvidací zabráníte oddělením zmíněných produktů od ostatních typů
odpadu a jejich zodpovědnou recyklací za účelem udržitelného využívání druhotných surovin. Uživatelé z řad domácností by si měli od
prodejce, u něhož produkt zakoupili, nebo u příslušného městského úřadu vyžádat informace, kde a jak mohou tyto výrobky odevzdat k
bezpečné ekologické recyklaci. Podnikoví uživatelé by měli kontaktovat dodavatele a zkontrolovat všechny podmínky kupní smlouvy. Tento
výrobek a jeho elektronické příslušenství nesmí být likvidován spolu s ostatním průmyslovým odpadem.
[Čeština]
Správna likvidácia tohoto výrobku (Elektrotechnický a elektronický odpad)
(Platné pre Európsku úniu a ostatné európske krajiny so systémom triedeného odpadu)
Toto označenie na výrobku, príslušenstve alebo v sprievodnej brožúre hovorí, že po skončení životnosti by produkt ani jeho elektronické
príslušenstvo (napr. nabíjačka, náhlavná súprava, USB kábel) nemali byť likvidované s ostatným domovým odpadom. Prípadnému
poškodeniu životného prostredia alebo ľudského zdravia môžete predísť tým, že budete tieto výrobky oddeľovať od ostatného odpadu a
vrátite ich na recykláciu. Používatelia v domácnostiach by pre podrobné informácie, ako ekologicky bezpečne naložiť s týmito výrobkami,
mali kontaktovať buď predajcu, ktorý im ich predal, alebo príslušný úrad v mieste ich bydliska. Priemyselní používatelia by mali kontaktovať
svojho dodávateľa a preveriť si podmienky kúpnej zmluvy. Tento výrobok a ani jeho elektronické príslušenstvo by nemali byť likvidované
spolu s ostatným priemyselným odpadom.
[Slovensky]
Cum se elimină corect acest produs (Deşeuri de echipamente electrice şi electronice)
(Aplicabil în ţările Uniunii Europene şi în alte ţări cu sisteme de colectare selectivă)
Acest simbol de pe produs, accesorii şi documentaţie indică faptul că produsul şi accesoriile sale electronice (încărcător, căşti, cablu USB)
nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la finalul duratei lor de utilizare. Dat fiind că eliminarea necontrolată a deşeurilor
poate dăuna mediului înconjurător sau sănătăţii umane, vă rugăm să separaţi aceste articole de alte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi în
mod responsabil, promovând astfel reutilizarea durabilă a resurselor materiale. Utilizatorii casnici trebuie să-l contacteze pe distribuitorul
care le-a vândut produsul sau să se intereseze la autorităţile locale unde şi cum pot să ducă aceste articole pentru a fi reciclate în mod
ecologic. Utilizatorii comerciali trebuie să-şi contacteze furnizorul şi să consulte termenii şi condiţiile din contractul de achiziţie. Acest produs
şi accesoriile sale electronice nu trebuie eliminate împreună cu alte deşeuri comerciale.
[Română]
Izstrādājuma pareiza likvidēšana (Attiecas uz nolietotām elektriskām un elektroniskām ierīcēm)
(Spēkā Eiropas Savienībā un pārējās Eiropas valstīs, kas izmanto atkritumu dalītu savākšanu)
Šis uz izstrādājuma un tā piederumiem vai pievienotajā dokumentācijā izvietotais marķējums norāda, ka izstrādājumu un tā elektroniskos
piederumus (piem., uzlādes ierīci, austiņas, USB kabeli) pēc ekspluatācijas laika beigām nedrīkst likvidēt kopā ar citiem sadzīves
atkritumiem. Lai nepieļautu atkritumu nekontrolētas likvidēšanas radītu varbūtēju kaitējumu videi un cilvēku veselībai, lūdzam minētās ierīces
nošķirt no citiem atkritumiem un disciplinēti nodot pienācīgai pārstrādei, tā sekmējot materiālo resursu atkārtotu izmantošanu. Lai uzzinātu,
kur un kā minētās ierīces iespējams nodot ekoloģiski drošai pārstrādei, mājsaimniecībām jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma pārdevēju vai savu
pašvaldību. Iestādēm un uzņēmumiem jāsazinās ar izstrādājuma piegādātāju un jāiepazīstas ar pirkuma līguma nosacījumiem. Izstrādājumu
un tā elektroniskos piederumus nedrīkst nodot likvidēšanai kopā ar citiem iestāžu un uzņēmumu atkritumiem.
[Latviešu]
Tinkamas šio gaminio išmetimas (elektros ir elektroninės įrangos atliekos)
Šis ženklas, pateiktas ant gaminio, jo priedų ar dokumentacijoje, nurodo, kad gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų (pvz., įkroviklio, ausinių,
USB kabelio) negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis gaminio naudojimo laikui pasibaigus. Kad būtų išvengta galimos
nekontroliuojamo atliekų išmetimo žalos aplinkai arba žmonių sveikatai ir skatinamas aplinką tausojantis antrinių žaliavų panaudojimas,
atskirkite šiuos elementus nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduokite perdirbti. Informacijos kur ir kaip pristatyti šiuos elementus saugiai perdirbti,
privatūs vartotojai turėtų kreiptis į parduotuvę, kurioje šį gaminį pirko, arba į vietos valdžios institucijas. Verslo vartotojai turėtų kreiptis
į savo tiekėją ir peržiūrėti pirkimo sutarties sąlygas. Tvarkant atliekas, šio gaminio ir jo elektroninių priedų negalima maišyti su kitomis
pramoninėmis atliekomis.
[Lietuvių]
Weee.indd 3 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24Õige viis toote kasutuselt kõrvaldamiseks (elektriliste ja elektrooniliste seadmete jäätmed)
Selline tähistus tootel või selle tarvikutel või dokumentidel näitab, et toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid (nt laadija, peakomplekt, USBkaabel) ei tohi kasutusaja lõppemisel kõrvaldada koos muude olmejäätmetega. Selleks et vältida jäätmete kontrollimatu kõrvaldamisega
seotud võimaliku kahju tekitamist keskkonnale või inimeste tervisele ning edendada materiaalsete vahendite säästvat taaskasutust,
eraldage need esemed muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need vastutustundlikult taasringlusse. Kodukasutajad saavad teavet nende esemete
keskkonnaohutu ringlussevõtu kohta kas toote müüjalt või keskkonnaametist. Firmad peaksid võtma ühendust tarnijaga ning kontrollima
ostulepingu tingimusi ja sätteid. Toodet ega selle elektroonilisi tarvikuid ei tohi panna muude hävitamiseks mõeldud kaubandusjäätmete
hulka.
[Eesti]
Weee.indd 4 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of
waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.
[English]
Elimination des batteries de ce produit
(Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en
place.)
Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que les batteries de ce produit ne doivent pas être éliminées en fin de vie avec
les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de
mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si les batteries ne sont pas
correctement éliminées, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources
naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer les batteries des autres types de déchets et à les recycler via votre
système local de collecte gratuite des batteries.
[Français]
Korrekte Entsorgung der Batterien dieses Produkts
(In den Ländern der Europäischen Union und anderen europäischen Ländern mit einem separaten Altbatterie-Rücknahmesystem)
Die Kennzeichnung auf der Batterie bzw. auf der dazugehörigen Dokumentation oder Verpackung gibt an, dass die Batterie zu diesem
Produkt nach seiner Lebensdauer nicht zusammen mit dem normalen Haushaltsmüll entsorgt werden darf. Wenn die Batterie mit den
chemischen Symbolen Hg, Cd oder Pb gekennzeichnet ist, liegt der Quecksilber-, Cadmium- oder Blei-Gehalt der Batterie über den in der
EG-Richtlinie 2006/66 festgelegten Referenzwerten. Wenn Batterien nicht ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden, können sie der menschlichen
Gesundheit bzw. der Umwelt schaden. Bitte helfen Sie, die natürlichen Ressourcen zu schützen und die nachhaltige Wiederverwertung
von stofflichen Ressourcen zu fördern, indem Sie die Batterien von anderen Abfällen getrennt über Ihr örtliches kostenloses AltbatterieRücknahmesystem entsorgen.
[Deutsch]
Correcte behandeling van een gebruikte accu uit dit product
(Van toepassing op de Europese Unie en andere Europese landen met afzonderlijke inzamelingssystemen voor accu’s en batterijen.)
Dit merkteken op de accu, handleiding of verpakking geeft aan dat de accu in dit product aan het einde van de levensduur niet samen met
ander huishoudelijk afval mag worden weggegooid. De chemische symbolen Hg, Cd of Pb geven aan dat het kwik-, cadmium- of loodgehalte
in de accu hoger is dan de referentieniveaus in de Richtlijn 2006/66/EC. Indien de gebruikte accu niet op de juiste wijze wordt behandeld,
kunnen deze stoffen schadelijk zijn voor de gezondheid van mensen of het milieu. Ter bescherming van de natuurlijke hulpbronnen en ter
bevordering van het hergebruik van materialen, verzoeken wij u afgedankte accu’s en batterijen te scheiden van andere soorten afval en
voor recycling aan te bieden bij het gratis inzamelingssysteem voor accu’s en batterijen in uw omgeving.
[Nederlands]
Corretto smaltimento delle batterie del prodotto
(Applicabile nei paesi dell’Unione Europea e in altri paesi europei con sistemi di conferimento differenziato delle batterie.)
Il marchio riportato sulla batteria o sulla sua documentazione o confezione indica che le batterie di questo prodotto non devono essere
smaltite con altri rifiuti domestici al termine del ciclo di vita. Dove raffigurati, i simboli chimici Hg, Cd o Pb indicano che la batteria contiene
mercurio, cadmio o piombo in quantità superiori ai livelli di riferimento della direttiva UE 2006/66. Se le batterie non vengono smaltite
correttamente, queste sostanze possono causare danni alla salute umana o all’ambiente. Per proteggere le risorse naturali e favorire il
riutilizzo dei materiali, separare le batterie dagli altri tipi di rifiuti e riciclarle utilizzando il sistema di conferimento gratuito previsto nella propria
area di residenza.
[Italiano]
Eliminación correcta de las baterías de este producto
(Aplicable en la Unión Europea y en otros países europeos con sistemas de recogida selectiva de baterías.)
La presencia de esta marca en las baterías, el manual o el paquete del producto indica que cuando haya finalizado la vida útil de las
baterías no deberán eliminarse junto con otros residuos domésticos. Los símbolos químicos Hg, Cd o Pb, si aparecen, indican que la batería
contiene mercurio, cadmio o plomo en niveles superiores a los valores de referencia admitidos por la Directiva 2006/66 de la Unión Europea.
Si las baterías no se desechan convenientemente, estas sustancias podrían provocar lesiones personales o dañar el medioambiente. Para
proteger los recursos naturales y promover el reciclaje, separe las baterías de los demás residuos y recíclelas mediante el sistema de
recogida gratuito de su localidad.
[Español]
Eliminação correcta das baterias existentes neste produto
(Aplicável na União Europeia e noutros países europeus com sistemas de recolha de baterias separados.)
Esta marca, apresentada na bateria, manual ou embalagem, indica que as baterias existentes neste produto não devem ser eliminadas
juntamente com os resíduos domésticos indiferenciados no final do seu período de vida útil. Onde existentes, os símbolos químicos Hg, Cd
ou Pb indicam que a bateria contém mercúrio, cádmio ou chumbo acima dos níveis de referência indicados na Directiva CE 2006/66. Se as
baterias não forem correctamente eliminadas, estas substâncias poderão ser prejudiciais para a saúde humana ou para o meio ambiente.
Para proteger os recursos naturais e promover a reutilização dos materiais, separe as baterias dos outros tipos de resíduos e recicle-as
através do sistema gratuito de recolha local de baterias.
[Português]
Ustrezno odstranjevanje baterij v tem izdelku
(Uporabno v EU in ostalih evropskih državah s sistemi ločenega odstranjevanja baterij)
Ta oznaka na bateriji, v navodilih ali na embalaži pomeni, da baterij ob izteku njihove življenjske dobe v tem izdelku ne smete odstraniti
skupaj z ostalimi gospodinjskimi odpadki. Oznake za kemijske elemente Hg, Cd ali Pb pomenijo, da baterija vsebuje živo srebro, kadmij ali
svinec v količinah, ki presegajo referenčne nivoje v direktivi EC 2006/66. Če te baterije niso ustrezno odstranjene, te snovi lahko škodujejo
zdravju ljudi oziroma okolju. Za zaščito naravnih virov in za vzpodbujanje ponovne uporabe materialov prosimo, ločite te baterije od ostalih
odpadkov in jih oddajte na predvidenih lokalnih zbirnih reciklažnih mestih.
[Slovenščina]
Korrekt avfallshantering av batterierna i denna produkt
(Gäller EU och andra europeiska länder med särskild batteriåtervinning.) Denna markering på batteriet, i manualen eller på förpackningen
anger att batterierna i denna produkt inte bör slängas tillsammans med annat hushållsavfall. De kemiska symbolerna Hg, Cd eller Pb
visar i förekommande fall att batterierna innehåller kvicksilver, kadmium eller bly i mängder överstigande de gränsvärden som anges i
EU-direktivet 2006/66. Om batterierna inte slängs på ett ansvarsfullt sätt kan dessa substanser utgöra en fara för hälsa eller miljö. Hjälp till
att skydda naturresurser och bidra till materialåtervinning genom att sortera batterierna separat från annat avfall och lämna in dem på en
återvinningsstation.
[Svenska]
Weee.indd 5 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24KKorrekt bortskaffelse af batterierne i dette produkt
(Gælder i EU og andre europæiske lande med særlige retursystemer for batterier).
Mærket på dette batteri, dokumentationen eller emballagen betyder, at batterierne i dette produkt efter endt levetid ikke må bortskaffes
sammen med andet husholdningsaffald. Mærkning med de kemiske symboler Hg, Cd eller Pb betyder, at batteriet indeholder kviksølv,
cadmium eller bly over grænseværdierne i EU-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batterierne ikke bortskaffes korrekt, kan disse stoffer være skadelige
for menneskers helbred eller for miljøet. For at beskytte naturens ressourcer og fremme genbrug, skal batterier holdes adskilt fra andre typer
affald og genanvendes via dit lokale, gratis batteriretursystem.
[Dansk]
Korrekt avhending av batterier i dette produkt
(Kommer til anvendelse i Den europeiske union og i andre europeiske land med separate systemer for retur av batterier.)
Denne merkingen på batteriet, håndboken eller emballasjen angir at batteriene i dette produktet ikke skal kastes sammen med annet
husholdningsavfall ved slutten av sin levetid. Der det er merket, angir de kjemiske symbolene Hg, Cd eller Pb at batteriet inneholder
kvikksølv, kadmium eller bly over referansenivåene i EF-direktiv 2006/66. Hvis batteriene ikke avhendes på riktig måte, kan disse stoffene
skade menneskers helse eller miljøet. For å beskytte naturressurser og for å fremme gjenbruk av materialer, ber vi deg adskille batterier fra
andre typer avfall og resirkulere dem ved å levere dem på din lokale, gratis mottaksstasjon.
[Norsk]
Tuotteen paristojen oikea hävittäminen
(Koskee Euroopan Unionia ja muita Euroopan maita, joissa on erillinen paristojen palautusjärjestelmä.)
Pariston, käyttöoppaan tai pakkauksen tämä merkintä tarkoittaa, että tämän tuotteen sisältämiä paristoja ei saa hävittää muun
kotitalousjätteen seassa, kun niiden käyttöikä on päättynyt. Kemiallinen symboli Hg, Cd tai Pb ilmaisee, että paristo sisältää elohopeaa,
kadmiumia tai lyijyä ylin EU: n direktiivien 2006/66 viiterajojen. Jos paristoja ei hävitetä oikein, nämä aineet voivat vahingoittaa ihmisten
terveyttä tai ympäristöä. Suojaa luonnonvaroja ja edistä materiaalien uusiokäyttöä - erottele paristot muusta jätteestä ja toimita ne
kierrätettäväksi paikalliseen maksuttomaan paristojen palautusjärjestelmään.
[Suomi]
A termékhez tartozó akkumulátorok megfelelő ártalmatlanítása
(Az Európai Unió területén és más, önálló akkumulátorleadó rendszerrel rendelkező európai országok területén alkalmazandó.)
Az akkumulátoron, a kézikönyvön vagy a csomagoláson szereplő jelzés arra utal, hogy hasznos élettartama végén a terméket nem
szabad egyéb háztartási hulladékkal együtt kidobni. Ahol szerepel a jelzés, a Hg, Cd vagy Pb kémiai elemjelölések arra utalnak, hogy
az akkumulátor az EK 2006/66. számú irányelvben rögzített referenciaszintet meghaladó mennyiségű higanyt, kadmiumot vagy ólmot
tartalmaz. Az akkumulátorok nem megfelelő kezelése esetén ezek az anyagok veszélyt jelenthetnek az egészségre vagy a környezetre.
A természeti erőforrások megóvása és az anyagok újrafelhasználásának ösztönzése érdekében kérjük, különítse el az akkumulátorokat a
többi hulladéktól és vigye vissza a helyi, ingyenes akkumulátorleadó helyre.
[Magyar]
Sposób poprawnego usuwania baterii, w które wyposażony jest niniejszy produkt
(Dotyczy obszaru Unii Europejskiej oraz innych krajów europejskich posiadających oddzielne systemy zwrotu zużytych baterii.)
Niniejsze oznaczenie na baterii, instrukcji obsługi lub opakowaniu oznacza, że po upływie okresu użytkowania baterie, w które wyposażony
był dany produkt, nie mogą zostać usunięte wraz z innymi odpadami pochodzącymi z gospodarstw domowych. Przy zastosowaniu takiego
oznaczenia symbole chemiczne (Hg, Cd lub Pb) wskazują, że dana bateria zawiera rtęć, kadm lub ołów w ilości przewyższającej poziomy
odniesienia opisane w dyrektywie WE 2006/66. Jeśli baterie nie zostaną poprawnie zutylizowane, substancje te mogą powodować
zagrożenie dla zdrowia ludzkiego lub środowiska naturalnego. Aby chronić zasoby naturalne i promować ponowne wykorzystanie
materiałów, należy oddzielać baterie od innego typu odpadów i poddawać je utylizacji poprzez lokalny, bezpłatny system zwrotu baterii.
[Polski]
Σωστή απόρριψη των μπαταριών αυτού του προϊόντος
(Ισχύει στην Ευρωπαϊκή Ένωση και άλλες ευρωπαϊκές χώρες με συστήματα ξεχωριστής ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών.)
Αυτή η επισήμανση πάνω στη μπαταρία, το εγχειρίδιο ή τη συσκευασία υποδεικνύει ότι οι μπαταρίες αυτού του προϊόντος δεν πρέπει να
απορρίπτονται μαζί με άλλα οικιακά απορρίμματα στο τέλος του κύκλου ζωής τους. Όπου υπάρχουν, τα χημικά σύμβολα Hg, Cd ή Pb
υποδεικνύουν ότι η μπαταρία περιέχει υδράργυρο, κάδμιο ή μόλυβδο πάνω από τα επίπεδα αναφοράς της Ευρωπαϊκής Οδηγίας 2006/66.
Αν οι μπαταρίες δεν απορριφθούν σωστά, αυτές οι ουσίες ενδέχεται να προκαλέσουν βλαβερές συνέπειες στην ανθρώπινη υγεία ή το
περιβάλλον. Παρακαλούμε διαχωρίζετε τις μπαταρίες από άλλους τύπους απορριμμάτων και ανακυκλώνετέ τις μέσω του τοπικού σας,
δωρεάν συστήματος ανακύκλωσης μπαταριών, για την προστασία των φυσικών πόρων και την προώθηση της επαναχρησιμοποίησης
υλικών.
[Ελληνικά]
Правилно изхвърляне на батериите в този продукт
(Приложимо в Европейския съюз и други европейски държави със самостоятелни системи за връщане на батерии.)
Това обозначение върху батерията, ръководството или опаковката, показва, че батериите в този продукт не бива да се изхвърлят
с другите битови отпадъци в края на техния полезен живот. Където са маркирани, химическите символи Hg, Cd или Pb показват,
че батерията съдържа живак, кадмий или олово над контролните нива в Директива 2006/66 на ЕО. Ако батериите не се изхвърлят
правилно, тези вещества могат да предизвикат увреждане на човешкото здраве или на околната среда. За да предпазите
природните ресурси и за да съдействате за многократната употреба на материалните ресурси, моля отделяйте батериите от
другите видове отпадъчни продукти и ги рециклирайте посредством Вашата локална система за безплатно връщане на батерии.
[Български]
Weee.indd 6 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24Správná likvidace baterií v tomto výrobku
(Platí v Evropské unii a dalších evropských zemích s vlastními systémy zpětného odběru baterií.)
Tato značka na baterii, návodu nebo obalu znamená, že baterie v tomto výrobku nesmí být na konci své životnosti likvidovány společně s
jiným domovním odpadem. Případně vyznačené symboly chemikálií Hg, Cd nebo Pb upozorňují na to, že baterie obsahuje rtuť, kadmium
nebo olovo v množství překračujícím referenční úrovně stanovené směrnicí ES 2006/66. Pokud baterie nejsou správně zlikvidovány, mohou
tyto látky poškodit zdraví osob nebo životní prostředí. Pro ochranu přírodních zdrojů a pro podporu opakovaného využívání materiálů
oddělte, prosím, baterie od ostatních typů odpadu a nechte je recyklovat prostřednictvím místního bezplatného systému zpětného odběru
baterií.
[Čeština]
Správna likvidácia batérií v tomto výrobku
(Aplikovateľné v krajinách Európskej únie a v ostatných európskych krajinách, v ktorých existujú systémy separovaného zberu batérií.)
Toto označenie na batérii, príručke alebo balení hovorí, že batérie v tomto výrobku by sa po skončení ich životnosti nemali likvidovať spolu
s ostatným domovým odpadom. V prípade takéhoto označenia chemické symboly Hg, Cd alebo Pb znamenajú, že batéria obsahuje ortuť,
kadmium alebo olovo v množstve presahujúcom referenčné hodnoty smernice 2006/66/ES. Pri nevhodnej likvidácii batérií môžu tieto látky
poškodiť zdravie alebo životné prostredie. Za účelom ochrany prírodných zdrojov a podpory opätovného použitia materiálu batérie likvidujte
oddelene od iných typov odpadou a recyklujte ich prostredníctvom miestneho systému bezplatného zberu batérií.
[Slovensky]
Dispoziţii privind eliminarea corectă a bateriilor acestui produs
(aplicabile în Uniunea Europeană şi în alte ţări europene cu sisteme separate de colectare a bateriilor)
Acest marcaj de pe baterie, de pe manualul de utilizare sau de pe ambalaj indică faptul că bateriile acestui produs nu trebuie eliminate
împreună cu alte deşeuri menajere la sfârşitul ciclului lor de viaţă. Dacă sunt marcate, simbolurile chimice Hg, Cd sau Pb indică faptul că
bateria conţine mercur, cadmiu sau plumb peste nivelurile de referinţă prevăzute în Directiva CE 2006/66. În cazul în care bateriile nu sunt
eliminate corespunzător, aceste substanţe pot fi dăunătoare pentru sănătatea omului sau pentru mediu. În vederea protejării resurselor
naturale şi a promovării refolosirii materialelor, vă rugăm să separaţi bateriile de celelalte tipuri de deşeuri şi să le reciclaţi prin intermediul
sistemului gratuit de returnare a bateriilor la nivel local.
[Română]
Šī izstrādājuma bateriju pareiza utilizācija
(Piemērojama Eiropas Savienībā un citās Eiropas valstīs ar atsevišķām bateriju nodošanas sistēmām.)
Šis marķējums uz baterijas, rokasgrāmatā vai uz iepakojuma norāda, ka šī izstrādājuma bateriju pēc tās kalpošanas laika beigām nedrīkst
izmest ar citiem sadzīves atkritumiem. Ja uz baterijas ir atzīmēti ķīmiskie simboli, piem., Hg, Cd vai Pb, tie norāda, ka baterija satur
dzīvsudrabu, kadmiju vai svinu, kura saturs ir lielāks par EK Direktīvā 2006/66 minētajiem lielumiem. Ja baterijas tiek nepareizi likvidētas, šīs
vielas var radīt kaitējumu cilvēku veselībai vai videi. Lai aizsargātu dabas resursus un veicinātu materiālu otrreizēju izmantošanu, šķirojiet
baterijas atsevišķi no citiem atkritumu veidiem un nododiet tās otrreizējai pārstrādei, izmantojot bateriju vietējo bezmaksas nodošanas
sistēmu.
[Lietuvių]
Tinkamas šio produkto akumuliatorių tvarkymas
(Taikoma Europos Sąjungoje ir kitose Europos šalyse, kuriose galioja atskiros akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemos.)
Šis ženklas yra pateikiamas ant akumuliatoriaus, jo dokumentacijoje ar ant pakuotės nurodo, kad šio produkto akumuliatorių, pasibaigus
jų tarnavimo laikui, negalima išmesti kartu su kitomis buitinėmis atliekomis. Cheminiai simboliai Hg, Cd arba Pb rodo, kad akumuliatoriuje
yra gyvsidabrio, kadmio ar švino, kurio kiekis viršija normą, nurodytą ES direktyvoje 2006/66. Jei akumuliatoriai nebus tinkamai išmesti,
šios medžiagos gali sukelti žalos žmonių sveikatai ar aplinkai. Tam, kad būtų apsaugoti gamtos ištekliai ir skatinamas antrinių žaliavų
panaudojimas, pašome atskirti akumuliatorių nuo kitų rūšių atliekų ir atiduoti perdirbti vietinėje akumuliatorių grąžinimo sistemai.
[Lietuvių]
Őige viis toote akude kasutusest kőrvaldamiseks
(Rakendatav Euroopa Liidus ja teistes Euroopa riikides, kus on kasutusel spetsiaalsed akude kogumissüsteemid).
Selline tähistus akul, dokumentidel vői pakendil näitab, et toote akusid ei tohi kasutusaja lőppemisel kőrvaldada koos muude
olmejäätmetega. Keemilised elemendid Hg, Cd, vői Pb näitavad, et aku elavhőbeda, kaadmiumi vői plii sisaldus on EÜ direktiivi 2006/66
sihttasemest suurem. Kui akusid ei kőrvaldata őigel viisil, vőib nende sisu pőhjustada tervise-vői keskkonnakahjustusi. Selleks, et kaitsta
loodusvarasid ja edendada materjalide taaskasutamist, eraldage akud muudest jäätmetest ja suunake need taaskasutusse kohaliku, tasuta
teenusena pakutava akude tagastussüsteemi abil.
[Eesti]
Weee.indd 7 2009-03-02 �� 2:55:24
SGH-E570
Mode d'emploiCopyright
• Bluetooth®
est une marque déposée de
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. international
• Java
TM
est une marque ou une marque déposée
de Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Consignes de sécurité
importantes
N'utilisez jamais votre téléphone en
conduisant.
Garez votre véhicule avant d'utiliser un téléphone
en prise directe.
Eteignez votre téléphone lorsque vous
effectuez le plein de votre véhicule.
N'utilisez pas votre téléphone lorsque vous vous
trouvez dans une station d'essence ou à proximité
de produits combustibles ou chimiques.
Eteignez votre téléphone en avion.
Les téléphones mobiles peuvent engendrer des
interférences. Leur utilisation en avion est interdite
et dangereuse.
Eteignez votre téléphone à proximité de tout
équipement médical électronique.
Eteignez votre téléphone à proximité d'équipements
médicaux. Les équipements utilisés dans les
hôpitaux et les unités de soins sont sensibles aux
radiofréquences. Respectez la législation ou la
réglementation en vigueur.
Avant de vous servir de votre téléphone mobile,
lisez les consignes de sécurité suivantes, afin
d'éviter toute utilisation dangereuse ou
frauduleuse de votre téléphone.Consignes de sécurité importantes
1
Interférences
Tous les téléphones mobiles peuvent être sujets à
des interférences susceptibles d'affecter leurs
performances.
Réglementations spécifiques
Respectez les réglementations spécifiques en
vigueur à l'endroit où vous vous trouvez et éteignez
toujours votre téléphone lorsque son utilisation est
interdite ou lorsqu'il est susceptible de générer des
interférences ou d'être une source de danger.
Etanchéité
Votre téléphone n'est pas étanche. Gardez-le au
sec.
Utilisation normale
Utilisez votre téléphone comme un combiné
classique (écouteur plaqué sur l'oreille). Evitez tout
contact inutile avec l'antenne lorsque le téléphone
est allumé.
Appel d'urgence
Composez le numéro d'urgence national, puis
appuyez sur .
Ne laissez pas le téléphone à la portée des
enfants en bas âge.
Conservez le téléphone, ses pièces détachées et ses
accessoires hors de portée des enfants.
Accessoires et batteries
Utilisez uniquement les accessoires agréés par
Samsung : batteries, casques et câbles de
connexion PC. L'emploi de tout accessoire non
homologué pourrait endommager votre téléphone et
s'avérer dangereux.
Réparation
Toute réparation de votre téléphone doit être
effectuée par un technicien agréé.
Pour plus d'informations sur la sécurité, consultez la
section « Informations relatives à la santé et à la
sécurité » à la page 118.
• Le téléphone risque d'exploser si vous remplacez
la batterie par un modèle inapproprié.
• Débarrassez-vous des batteries usagées en
respectant les instructions du fabricant.2
Présentation de ce mode d'emploi
Ce mode d'emploi fournit des instructions succinctes
pour l'utilisation de votre téléphone. Pour vous
familiariser avec ses principales fonctions, consultez
les chapitres « Mise en service » et « Au-delà des
fonctions téléphoniques ».
Voici les icônes utilisées dans ce mode d'emploi :
Signale d'importantes remarques concernant
la sécurité ou les fonctionnalités du téléphone.
Indique que la page référencée contient des
informations supplémentaires.
→ Indique que vous devez utiliser les touches de
navigation pour atteindre l'option spécifiée et
la sélectionner.
[ ] Désigne une touche du téléphone. Par
exemple, [ ]
< > Indique une touche écran dont la fonction est
affichée au bas de l'écran du téléphone. Par
exemple,